Service Manual
AWG510 & AWG520
Arbitrary Waveform Generator
071-0101-50
Warning
The servicing instructions are for use by qualified
personnel only. To avoid personal injury, do not
perform any servicing unless you are qualified to
do so. Refer to all safety summaries prior to
performing service.
www.tektronix.com
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARRANTY
Tektronix warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects in materials and workmanship
for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If a product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix,
at its option, either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in
exchange for the defective product.
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the
warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for
packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid.
Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the
Tektronix service center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any
other charges for products returned to any other locations.
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate
maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting
from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair
damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; c) to repair any damage or malfunction
caused by the use of non-Tektronix supplies; or d) to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other
products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO
REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO
THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE
OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
General Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacting Tektronix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
xiii
xv
xvii
xix
Specifications
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Certification and Compliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–3
1–4
1–14
1–15
1–17
Operating Information
Operating Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–1
Preparation for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplying Operating Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying and Interrupting Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repackaging Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installed Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–3
2–3
2–6
2–7
2–8
2–8
Basic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeric Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shortcut Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–9
2–9
2–13
2–15
2–17
2–18
Theory of Operation
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Data Out Option 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–1
3–1
3–4
Performance Verification
Performance Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–1
4–1
4–3
4–10
4–12
4–18
4–23
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding Faulty Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Mode Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Clock Frequency Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Amplitude and Offset Accuracy Tests (Normal Out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Amplitude, Offset Accuracy and Rise Time Tests (Direct DA Out) . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse Response Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sine Wave Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Trigger Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trigger Input Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Input and Enhanced Mode Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 MHz Reference Input Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Clock Input Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Input Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Output Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Delay Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Data Output Tests (Option 03 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock Output Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Noise Output Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–30
4–32
4–36
4–40
4–43
4–45
4–47
4–52
4–59
4–61
4–63
4–65
4–69
4–72
4–76
4–78
Adjustment Procedures
Adjustment Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements for Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjustment Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5–1
5–2
5–3
5–3
5–7
Maintenance
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–1
6–1
6–2
6–4
Removal and Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation — Please Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedures for External Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedures for Outer-Chassis Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedures for Inner-Chassis Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–9
6–9
6–16
6–17
6–30
6–44
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–55
6–55
Messages and Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–65
Options
Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7–1
7–1
7–3
7–3
Electrical Parts List
Electrical Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8–1
ii
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Diagrams
Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9–1
Mechanical Parts List
Replaceable Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Replaceable Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10–1
10–1
10–2
iii
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Figure 1–1: Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1–2: Signal timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–15
1–19
Figure 2–1: Menu buttons, bezel menu buttons, and the CLEAR MENU
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–9
2–10
2–11
2–12
2–13
2–14
2–15
2–17
2–21
2–21
Figure 2–2: Bottom and side menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–3: Pop-up menu example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–4: Dialog box example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–5: Knob icon displayed in Status Display Area . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–6: Keypad buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–7: Three type of Input text dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–8: Shortcut controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–9: Files and directories with read only attribute . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–10: Input Filename dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–1: Diagnostic menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–2: Calibration result message box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–4
4–6
Figure 4–3: EVENT IN connector pins and signals and ground closure
connector with 9-pin D-type connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–14
4–15
4–23
4–25
Figure 4–4: Loading file; selecting storage drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–5: Cont mode initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–6: Triggered mode initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–7: Relationship between trigger signal and waveform output . . . . .
4–26
Figure 4–8: Relationship between gate signal and waveform output .
Figure 4–9: Clock frequency initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–10: Amplitude accuracy initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–11: Direct DA out amplitude accuracy initial test hookup .
Figure 4–12: Direct DA out pulse rise time initial test hookup . . . . . .
Figure 4–13: Pulse response initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–14: Sine wave initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–15: Internal trigger initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–16: Trigger input initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–17: Trigger Signal (+5V check1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–18: Trigger Signal (+5V check2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–19: Trigger Signal (–5V check1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–28
4–30
4–32
4–36
4–38
4–40
4–43
4–45
4–47
4–49
4–50
4–51
iv
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Figure 4–20: Trigger Signal (–5V check2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–51
4–52
Figure 4–21: Event input and enhanced mode initial test hookup . . .
Figure 4–22: Waveform while all ground disclosure switches are open
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–53
4–54
4–55
4–55
4–56
4–57
4–58
4–59
4–61
4–63
4–65
4–69
4–72
4–74
4–76
4–78
Figure 4–23: Waveform output when the SW1 is closed . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–24: Waveform output when the SW2 is closed . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–25: Waveform output when the SW3 is closed . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–26: Waveform output when the SW4 is closed . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–27: Initial waveform output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–28: DC waveform output when the SW5 is closed . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–29: 10 MHz reference initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–30: External clock input initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–31: Add operation initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–32: Marker output initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–33: Digital data output initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–34: Digital data output level initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–35: Digital data output initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–36: Clock output initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–37: Noise output initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5–1: Cooling the waveform generator
during adjustment procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5–4
5–5
5–7
5–8
5–9
Figure 5–2: Accessing the service switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5–3: Hookup for the clock frequency adjustment . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5–4: Adjustment location for clock frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5–5: Hookup for the clock duty adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5–6: Adjustment location for clock duty, timing, and
linearity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5–11
5–12
5–15
5–18
5–19
5–20
Figure 5–7: Hookup for the DAC clock timing adjustment . . . . . . . .
Figure 5–8: Hookup for the DAC linearity adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5–9: Hookup for the noise output adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5–10: Adjustment location for noise level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5–11: Adjustment location for the power supply unit . . . . . . .
Figure 6–1: AWG510 and AWG520 Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–2: External modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–3: Outer-chassis modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–4: Inner-chassis modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–5: Knob Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–6: Line Fuse and Line Cord Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–12
6–13
6–14
6–15
6–18
6–19
v
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Figure 6–7: Cabinet removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–22
Figure 6–8: Trim ring, Menu buttons, and Output panel
removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–23
6–25
6–26
6–29
6–31
6–32
6–33
6–35
6–36
Figure 6–9: A20 Front-Panel Assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–10: Disassembly of Front-Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–11: Cabinet modules removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–12: Fan removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–13: Floppy Disk removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–14: Power supply module removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–15: A10/A11 Connector board removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–16: A60 Memory Board removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–17: A75 Noise Generator Board and
A71 (AWG510)/A72 (AWG520) Output Board removal . . . . . . . .
6–38
6–39
6–41
6–43
6–45
Figure 6–18: A40 Clock Board removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–19: A50 AWG board removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–20: Rear Chassis removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–21: CPU Unit removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–22: CPU, HDD/Flash disk, LAN, and
GPIB boards removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–46
6–47
6–51
6–52
6–54
6–56
Figure 6–23: Hard disk and flash disk removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–24: Display assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–25: Display Driver Board removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–26: Front Subpanel Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–27: Primary troubleshooting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–28: Troubleshooting procedure 1 — Power Supply
module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–57
6–58
Figure 6–29: Power Supply connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–30: Troubleshooting procedure 2 — CPU or Front Panel
module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–59
6–60
6–61
6–62
6–62
6–63
6–63
6–64
Figure 6–31: A20 Front Panel board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–32: Troubleshooting procedure 3 — Monitor module . . . .
Figure 6–33: A10/A11 Connector board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–34: Location of the VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–35: Horizontal and vertical sync signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–36: A video signal with white and black levels . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–37: Troubleshooting procedure 4 — Module isolation . . . . .
Figure 9–1: Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9–2: Interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9–3
9–5
vi
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Figure 10–1: Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10–5
10–7
10–9
Figure 10–2: Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10–3: Outer chassis modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10–4: Circuit boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–11
Figure 10–5: CPU unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–13
Figure 10–6: Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–15
Figure 10–7: Floppy disk and Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–17
Figure 10–8: Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–19
Figure 10–9: Rack mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–21
vii
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
List of Tables
Table 1–1: AWG 500-Series waveform editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–2: Operation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–3: Arbitrary waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–4: Clock generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–5: Internal trigger generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–6: Main output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–7: Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–8: Auxiliary outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–9: Period JItter (CH1 MARKER1 OUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–10: Cycle to Cycle JItter (CH1 MARKER1 OUT) . . . . . . .
Table 1–11: Period JItter (CLOCK OUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–12: Cycle to Cycle JItter (CLOCK OUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–13: Digital data out (option 03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–14: Auxiliary inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–15: Funcion Generator (FG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–16: Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–17: Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–18: AC line power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–19: Interface connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–20: Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–21: Installation requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–22: Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–23: Certifications and compliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–1
1–4
1–4
1–5
1–5
1–5
1–7
1–8
1–9
1–9
1–10
1–10
1–10
1–11
1–13
1–14
1–14
1–14
1–14
1–15
1–16
1–16
1–17
Table 2–1: Power-cord conductor identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–2: Power cord identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–3: Side menu elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–4: Text input button functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–5: Shortcut control descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–6: AWG500-Series Waveform Generator file types . . . . . . .
Table 2–7: Drive and Directory menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–8: Waveform record length adjustment messages . . . . . . . .
2–4
2–4
2–11
2–16
2–17
2–18
2–19
2–22
Table 4–1: Diagnostic categories and error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4–2: Module test error code examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4–3: Waveform memory cell test errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–7
4–10
4–11
viii
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Table 4–4: Performance test items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–12
4–13
4–16
Table 4–5: Test equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4–6: Waveforms and sequences in performance check disk . .
Table 5–1: Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5–2: Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5–3: File List for Performance Check/Adjustment Disk . . . . .
5–1
5–3
5–6
Table 6–1: Relative susceptibility to static-discharge damage . . . . . .
Table 6–2: External Inspection Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–3: Internal inspection check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–4: Tools required for module removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–5: Device errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–3
6–5
6–6
6–11
6–65
Table 7–1: Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7–2: Standard Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7–3: Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7–4: Accessory Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7–1
7–3
7–3
7–4
ix
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
x
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Safety Summary
Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to
this product or any products connected to it. To avoid potential hazards, use this
product only as specified.
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.
To Avoid Fire or
Personal Injury
Use Proper Power Cord. Use only the power cord specified for this product and
certified for the country of use.
Connect and Disconnect Properly. Do not connect or disconnect probes or test
leads while they are connected to a voltage source.
Ground the Product. This product is grounded through the grounding conductor
of the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be
connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the input or output
terminals of the product, ensure that the product is properly grounded.
Observe All Terminal Ratings. To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings
and markings on the product. Consult the product manual for further ratings
information before making connections to the product.
The common terminal is at ground potential. Do not connect the common
terminal to elevated voltages.
Do not apply a potential to any terminal, including the common terminal, that
exceeds the maximum rating of that terminal.
Do Not Operate Without Covers. Do not operate this product with covers or panels
removed.
Use Proper Fuse. Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product.
Avoid Exposed Circuitry. Do not touch exposed connections and components
when power is present.
Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures. If you suspect there is damage to this
product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel.
Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions.
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere.
Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry.
Provide Proper Ventilation. Refer to the manual’s installation instructions for
details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation.
xi
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Safety Summary
Symbols and Terms
Terms in this Manual. These terms may appear in this manual:
WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result
in injury or loss of life.
CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in
damage to this product or other property.
Terms on the Product. These terms may appear on the product:
DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the
marking.
WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the
marking.
CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.
Symbols on the Product. The following symbols may appear on the product:
WARNING
High Voltage
Protective Ground
(Earth) Terminal
CAUTION
Refer toManual
Double
Insulated
xii
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Safety Summary
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures. Read this Service
Safety Summary and the General Safety Summary before performing any service
procedures.
Do Not Service Alone. Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this
product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is
present.
Disconnect Power. To avoid electric shock, disconnect the mains power by means
of the power cord or, if provided, the power switch.
Use Caution When Servicing the CRT. To avoid electric shock or injury, use
extreme caution when handling the CRT. Only qualified personnel familiar with
CRT servicing procedures and precautions should remove or install the CRT.
CRTs retain hazardous voltages for long periods of time after power is turned off.
Before attempting any servicing, discharge the CRT by shorting the anode to
chassis ground. When discharging the CRT, connect the discharge path to ground
and then the anode. Rough handling may cause the CRT to implode. Do not nick
or scratch the glass or subject it to undue pressure when removing or installing it.
When handling the CRT, wear safety goggles and heavy gloves for protection.
Use Care When Servicing With Power On. Dangerous voltages or currents may
exist in this product. Disconnect power, remove battery (if applicable), and
disconnect test leads before removing protective panels, soldering, or replacing
components.
To avoid electric shock, do not touch exposed connections.
XĆRadiation. To avoid x-radiation exposure, do not modify or otherwise alter the
high-voltage circuitry or the CRT enclosure. X-ray emissions generated within
this product have been sufficiently shielded.
Memory Backup Battery. This product contains a Lithium:poly-carbon monofluo-
ride battery for memory backup purposes. This battery is not user replaceable.
xiii
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Safety Summary
xiv
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
This is the service manual for the AWG510 and AWG520 Arbitrary Waveform-
Generator. The manual contains information needed to service the waveform
generator to the module level.
Manual Structure
This manual is divided into sections, such as Specifications and Theory of
Operation. Further, some sections are divided into subsections, such as Product
Description and Removal and Installation Procedures.
Sections containing procedures also contain introductions to those procedures.
Be sure to read these introductions because they provide information needed to
do the service correctly and efficiently. The following contains a brief description
of each manual section.
H
H
H
H
H
H
Specifications contains a description of the waveform generator and the
characteristics that apply to it.
Operating Information includes general information and operating
instructions.
Theory of Operation contains circuit descriptions that support service to the
module level.
Performance Verification contains procedures for confirming that the
waveform generator functions properly and meets warranted limits.
Adjustment Procedures contains a statement explaining that adjustment is
unnecessary for the waveform generator.
Maintenance contains information and procedures for performing preventive
and corrective maintenance of the waveform generator . These instructions
include cleaning, module removal and installation, and fault isolation to the
module.
H
H
Options contains information on servicing factory-installed options.
Electrical Parts List contains a statement referring you to Mechanical Parts
List, where both electrical and mechanical modules are listed.
H
H
Diagrams contains block diagrams and an interconnection diagram.
Mechanical Parts List includes a table of all replaceable modules, their
descriptions, and their Tektronix part numbers.
xv
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
Manual Conventions
This manual uses certain conventions that you should become familiar with.
Some sections of the manual contain procedures for you to perform. To keep
those instructions clear and consistent, this manual uses the following conven-
tions:
H
Names of front panel controls and menus appear in the same case (initial
capitals, all uppercase, etc.) in the manual as is used on the waveform
generator front panel and menus. Front panel names are all upper-case
letters; for example, SETUP, UTILITY, HARDCOPY etc.
H
Instruction steps are numbered unless there is only one step.
Modules
Throughout this manual, any replaceable component, assembly, or part of the
waveform generator is referred to generically as a module. In general, a module
is an assembly (like a circuit board), rather than a component (like a resistor or
an integrated circuit). Sometimes a single component is a module; for example,
the chassis of the waveform generator is a module.
Safety
Symbols and terms related to safety appear in the Safety Summary near the
beginning of this manual.
Finding Other Information
Other documentation for the AWG510 and AWG520 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator includes:
H
The AWG510 and AWG520 User Manual contains a tutorial to quickly
describe how to operate the waveform generator. It also includes an in-depth
discussion on how to more completely use the waveform generator features.
H
The AWG500 Series Programmer Manual explains how to use a GPIB
interface to remotely control the waveform generator.
xvi
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
This manual contains information needed to properly service the AWG510 and
AWG520 Arbitrary Waveform Generators, as well as general information critical
to safe and effective servicing.
To prevent personal injury or damage to the waveform generator, consider the
following before attempting service:
H
H
H
The procedures in this manual should be performed only by a qualified
service person
Read the General Safety Summary and the Service Safety Summary,
beginning on page xi
Read Preparation for Use in section 2, Operating Information
When using this manual for servicing, be sure to follow all warnings, cautions,
and notes.
Performance Check Interval
Generally, the performance check described in section 4,
Performance Verification, should be done every 12 months. In addition, a
performance check is recommended after module replacement.
If the waveform generator does not meet performance criteria, repair is
necessary.
Strategy for Servicing
Throughout this manual, the term, module, refers to any field-replaceable
component, assembly, or part of the waveform generator.
This manual contains all the information needed for periodic maintenance of the
waveform generator. Further, it contains all information for corrective mainte-
nance down to the module level. To isolate a failure to a module, use the
troubleshooting procedures found in section 6, Maintenance. To remove and
replace any failed module, follow the instructions in Removal and Installation
Procedures, also part of section 6. After isolating a faulty module, replace it with
a fully-tested module obtained from the factory. Section 10, Mechanical Parts
List, contains part number and ordering information for all replaceable modules.
xvii
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Tektronix Service Offerings
Tektronix provides service to cover repair under warranty as well as other
services that may provide a cost-effective answer to your service needs.
Whether providing warranty repair service or any of the other services listed
below, Tektronix service technicians are well equipped to service the waveform
generator. Tektronix technicians train on Tektronix products; they have access to
the latest information on improvements to the AWG510 and AWG520 as well as
new options.
WarrantyRepair Service
Tektronix warrants this product for one year from date of purchase. The warranty
appears on the back of the title page in this manual. Tektronix technicians
provide warranty service at most Tektronix service locations. The Tektronix
product catalog lists all worldwide service locations.
Self Service
Tektronix supports repair to the module level by providing Module Exchange.
Module Exchange. This service reduces down-time for repair by allowing you to
exchange most modules for remanufactured ones. Each module comes with a
90-day service warranty.
For More Information. Contact your local Tektronix service center or sales
engineer for more information on any of the repair or adjustment services just
described.
xviii
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Contacting Tektronix
Phone
1-800-833-9200*
Address
Tektronix, Inc.
Department or name (if known)
14200 SW Karl Braun Drive
P.O. Box 500
Beaverton, OR 97077
USA
Web site
www.tektronix.com
Sales support
Service support
Technical support
1-800-833-9200, select option 1*
1-800-833-9200, select option 2*
Email: [email protected]
1-800-833-9200, select option 3*
1-503-627-2400
6:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. Pacific time
*
This phone number is toll free in North America. After office hours, please leave a
voice mail message.
Outside North America, contact a Tektronix sales office or distributor; see the
Tektronix web site for a list of offices.
xix
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
xx
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Product Overview
The AWG510 and AWG520 Arbitrary Waveform Generators can generate both
simple and arbitrary waveforms. The AWG510 generates one-channel differential
output, while the AWG520 generates two-channel single-end arbitrary wave-
forms and function generator waveforms.
The AWG500-Series Generator contains a 1 GHz clock frequency, a 10-bit DA
converter, and a 4 M-word waveform memory. The instrument also provides
two-channel arbitrary marker outputs and a Digital Data Out option (Option 03)
that bypasses the DA converter to directly output the waveform memory digital
data.
The AWG510 and AWG520 includes five waveform editors, as described in the
following table.
Table 1-1: AWG 500ĆSeries waveform editors
Editor
Description
Waveform
Pattern
Creates analog waveform data in graphic or tabular form.
Creates digital waveform data in timing and table form.
Sequence
Creates sequences of waveforms by combining the waveform files
created with the Waveform and/or Pattern Editors.
Text
Edits plain ASCIIĆformat waveform files. For example, youcan
use the Text editor to edit ASCIIĆformat waveform files that are
read from an external device.
Equation
Creates files with equations and compiles them into waveform
files.
The AWG500-Series function generator produces sine, triangle, square, and ramp
waves, as well as direct current and noises signals. It allows you to set waveform
attributes such as frequency, amplitude, and offset.
This instrument contains a hard disk drive, a 3.5-inch floppy disk drive and
Ethernet interface for storing and recalling waveform data and instrument
settings.
You can remotely control the instrument by sending commands through the
GPIB interface, as well as transfer waveform data directly from a digital storage
oscilloscope to the AWG500 instrument using the GPIB interface. This enables
you to use the instrument in combination with other measurement equipment
and/or a computer.
1-1
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Product Overview
1-2
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
This section contains the AWG510 and AWG520 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
specifications. All specifications are guaranteed unless labeled “typical”. Typical
specifications are provided for your convenience but are not guaranteed.
Specifications that are marked with the n asterisk (*) symbol in the column
Characteristics are checked in Appendix B: Performance Verification and the
page number referenced to the corresponding performance verification proce-
dures can be found in the column PV reference page.
The characteristics in the specifications are listed in tables that are divided into
categories. In these tables, the subcategories may also appear in boldface under
the column Characteristics.
Performance Conditions
The performance limits in this specification are valid with these conditions:
H
H
The Waveform Generator must have been calibrated/adjusted at an ambient
temperature between +20_ C and +30_ C.
The Waveform Generator must be in an environment with temperature,
altitude, humidity, and vibration within the operating limits described in
these specifications.
H
H
The Waveform Generator must have had a warm-up period of at least 20
minutes.
The Waveform Generator must be operating at an ambient temperature
between +10_ C and +40_ C.
1-3
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Electrical Specification
Table 1-2: Operation modes
Characteristics
Description
Continuous
Waveform is continuously output in this mode. When a sequence is defined, waveforms
are sequentially or repeatedly output in the order defined by the sequence. The extended
sequence functions such as trigger input, event jump, etc. are neglected in this mode.
Triggered
Gated
Waveform is output only once when a trigger event is created. A trigger signal is created by
the external trigger input signal, GPIB trigger command, and/or pressing the front-panel
FORCE TRIGGER button. The extended sequence functions such as trigger input, event
jump, etc. are neglected in this mode.
The waveform is output as the same way as in the continuous mode only when the gate is
opened. The gate is opened by the gated signal.
Note that the output is made from the top of the first waveform for every gate periode. The
clock signal continuously output from the connector even outside the gate periode.
Enhanced
The waveforms are sequentially or repeatedly output according to the procedures defined
in the sequence. All extended functions such as trigger input, event jump, etc. are effective
and waveforms are controlled for output by this functions in this mode.
Table 1-3: Arbitrary waveforms
Characteristics
Waveform memory
Marker memory
Description
Memory length: 4,194,048 words (10 bits/1 word)
Memory length:
AWG510
4,194,048 words (2 markers 1 bit / 1 word)
AWG520
4,194,048 words (4 markers 1 bit / 1 word)
Sequence memory
Maximum 8000 steps
The sequence operates for both CH1 and CH2 in the AWG520.
1 to 65536, or Infinite
Sequence counter
Waveform data points
Multiple of 4 in the range from 256 to 4,198,048 points
1-4
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-4: Clock generator
Characteristics
Sampling frequency
Resolution
Description
PV reference page
50.000 000 kHz to 1.000 000 0 GHz
8 digits
1
Internal clock
* Frequency accuracy
Phase noise, Typical
Page 4-30
"1 ppm (25 _C), during 1 year after calibration
-80 dBc / Hz (1 GHz with 10 kHz offset)
-100 dBc/Hz (1 GHz with 100 kHz offset)
1
The internal reference oscillator is used.
Table 1-5: Internal trigger generator
Characteristics
Internal trigger rate
* Accuracy
Description
PV reference page
2
Page 4-45
"0.1%
Range
1.0 ms to 10.0 s
3 digits, minimum 0.1 ms
Resolution
2
The internal reference oscillator is used.
Table 1-6: Main output
3
Characteristics
Output connector
Output signal
AWG510
Description
PV reference page
front-panel BNC connectors
Complemental; CH1 and CH1
SingleĆended; CH1 and CH2
AWG520
DA converter
Differential nonĆlinearity
Within 1 bit
Within 1 bit
10 bits
Integral nonĆlinearity
Resolution
Output impedance
50 W
1-5
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-6: Main output (Cont.)
3
Characteristics
Description
PV reference page
Normal out
Output voltage
Amplitude
Range
-2.0 V to +2.0V, into a 50 W load
20 mV to 2 V , into a 50 W load
p-p p-p
Resolution
* DC accuracy
Offset
1 mV
Page 4-32
"(1.5 % of amplitude + 2 mV), offset: 0 V
Range
-1.000 V to 1.000 V, into a 50 W load
Resolution
* Offset accuracy
1 mV
Page 4-32
Page 4-40
"(1 % of offset + 10 mV),
20 mV amplitude (waveform data: 0)
Reverse power protection
* Pulse response
Up to 0.4 W
(Waveform data: -1 and 1, offset: 0 V, and filter: through)
Rise time (10 % to 90 %)
x 2.5 ns (amplitude u 1.0 V
)
)
p-p
x 1.5 ns (amplitude x 1.0 V
p-p
Fall time (10 % to 90 %)
* Aberration
x 2.5 ns (amplitude u 1.0 V
)
)
p-p
x 1.7 ns (amplitude x 1.0 V
p-p
(500 MHz Bandwidth)
Page 4-40
"10 % (amplitude u 1.0 V
)
)
p-p
"7 % (amplitude x 1.0 V
p-p
* Flatness
Page 4-40
Page 4-43
"3 % (after 50 ns from rise and fall edges)
Small signal bandwidth, Typical 300 MHz (-3 dB, amplitude fixed to 0.5 V)
* Sinewave characteristics
(CH1 and CH2)
(Clock: 1 GHz, waveform points: 32, frequency: 31.25 MHz,
amplitude: 1.0 V, offset: 0 V, filter: through)
Harmonics
Noise
x -50 dBc (DC to 400 MHz)
x -53 dBc (DC to 400 MHz)
Phase Noise
x -90 dBc / Hz (10 kHz offset)
1-6
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-6: Main output (Cont.)
3
Characteristics
Description
PV reference page
Direct DA out
Output voltage
* DC accuracy
Amplitude
0.5 V (with -0.27 V offset), into a 50 W load
pĆp
Page 4-36
Page 4-40
0.5 V "10 %
pĆp
DC offset
-0.27 V "10 %
* Pulse response
Rise time (10 % to 90 %)
(Waveform data: -1 and 1)
x 700 ps
x 700 ps
Fall time (10 % to 90 %)
3
The characteristics are specified at the end of the BNC cable (012Ć0482Ć00).
Table 1-7: Filter
Characteristics
Type
Description
Bessel low pass filter, 100 MHz, 50 MHz, 20 MHz, and 10 MHz
Rise time (10 % to 90 %)
10 MHz
20 MHz
50 MHz
100 MHz
35 ns
17 ns
7.0 ns
3.5 ns
Delay from trigger
10 MHz
20 MHz
50 MHz
100 MHz
Through
77 ns )1 clock
57 ns )1 clock
47 ns )1 clock
42 ns )1 clock
37 ns )1 clock
See Figure 1-2 for T
d1
1-7
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-8: Auxiliary outputs
Characteristics
Description
PV reference page
4
Marker
Number of markers
AWG510
2
4
( Note that the markers are not additionally installed even
when the Option 03 is installed. )
AWG520
Level (Hi/Lo)
-2.0 V to +2.0 V, into a 50 W load
-4.0 V to +4.0 V, into a 1 MW load
Resolution
* Accuracy
0.05 V
Page 4-65
Page 4-69
Within "(0.1 V +5 % of setting)
Rise and fall times (10 % to 90 %),
Typical
0.5 ns (1 V , Hi: +0.5 V, Lo: -0.5 V)
pĆp
1.0 ns (2 V ,Hi: +1 V, Lo: -1 V)
pĆp
2.0 ns (4 VpĆ , Hi: +2 V, Lo: -2 V)
p
Variable delay
Range
0 ns to +2 ns
Resolution
Period jitter
Typical
20 ps
Measured by TDS694C-1MHD with TDSJIT1
Refer to Table 1-9.
Cycle to cycle jitter
Typical
Measured by TDS694C-1MHD with TDSJIT1
Refer to Table 1-10.
4
Marker skew
32 ps
Connector
Offset
Rear panel SMB connectors
5
Clock out
Page 4-76
Level
ECL 100 K compatible (internally loaded in 50 W to -2 V and 43 W
series terminated)
Period jitter
Typical
Measured by TDS694C-1MHD with TDSJIT1
Refer to Table 1-11.
Cycle to cycle jitter
Typical
Measured by TDS694C-1MHD with TDSJIT1
Refer to Table 1-12.
Connector
Rear panel BNC connectors
1-8
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-8: Auxiliary outputs (Cont.)
Characteristics
Description
PV reference page
5
Noise
Level
-145 dBm / Hz to -105 dBm / Hz
1 dB step
Attenuator
Accuracy
Connector
Page 4-78
"2.5 dB (at 100 MHz, -105 dBm/Hz)
Rear panel BNC connectors
Gaussian
Type
4
The characteristics are specified at the end of the SMB-BNC cable (012Ć1459Ć00).
The characteristics are specified at the end of the BNC cable (012Ć0482Ć00).
5
Table 1-9: Period JItter (CH1 MARKER1 OUT)
Clock
1 GS/s
800 MS/s
400 MS/s
Pk-Pk
Measurement
AWG520
StdDev
6.0 ps
6.0 ps
5.0 ps
6.0 ps
Pk-Pk
42.0 ps
42.0 ps
35.0 ps
42.0 ps
StdDev
5.0 ps
5.0 ps
5.0 ps
5.0 ps
Pk-Pk
30.0 ps
30.0 ps
30.0 ps
30.0 ps
StdDev
4.5 ps
4.5 ps
4.5 ps
4.5 ps
26.0 ps
26.0 ps
26.0 ps
26.0 ps
AWG520 OP3
AWG510
AWG510 OP3
Table 1-10: Cycle to Cycle JItter (CH1 MARKER1 OUT)
Clock
1 GS/s
800 MS/s
400 MS/s
Pk-Pk
Measurement
AWG520
StdDev
9.5 ps
9.5 ps
8.5 ps
9.5 ps
Pk-Pk
70.0 ps
70.0 ps
60.0 ps
70.0 ps
StdDev
9.0 ps
9.0 ps
8.0 ps
9.0 ps
Pk-Pk
55.0 ps
55.0 ps
55.0 ps
55.0 ps
StdDev
8.0 ps
8.0 ps
8.0 ps
8.0 ps
50.0 ps
50.0 ps
50.0 ps
50.0 ps
AWG520 OP3
AWG510
AWG510 OP3
1-9
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-11: Period JItter (CLOCK OUT)
Clock
1 GS/s
800 MS/s
400 MS/s
Measurement
AWG520
StdDev
11.0 ps
14.0 ps
5.5 ps
Pk-Pk
42.0 ps
50.0 ps
30.0 ps
75.0 ps
StdDev
11.0 ps
14.0 ps
5.5 ps
Pk-Pk
42.0 ps
50.0 ps
30.0 ps
50.0 ps
StdDev
11.0 ps
14.0 ps
5.5 ps
Pk-Pk
42.0 ps
50.0 ps
30.0 ps
50.0 ps
AWG520 OP3
AWG510
AWG510 OP3
11.0 ps
11.0 ps
11.0 ps
Table1-12: Cycleto CycleJItter (CLOCK OUT)
Clock
1 GS/s
800 MS/s
400 MS/s
Measurement
AWG520
StdDev
18.0 ps
22.0 ps
9.0 ps
Pk-Pk
82.0 ps
86.0 ps
52.0 ps
125.0 ps
StdDev
18.0 ps
22.0 ps
9.0 ps
Pk-Pk
82.0 ps
86.0 ps
52.0 ps
90.0 ps
StdDev
18.0 ps
22.0 ps
9.0 ps
Pk-Pk
82.0 ps
86.0 ps
52.0 ps
90.0 ps
AWG520 OP3
AWG510
AWG510 OP3
20.0 ps
18.0 ps
18.0 ps
Table1-13: Digital data out (option 03)
6
Characteristics
Description
PV reference page
Output signal
Connector
Level
D0 to D9
Rear panel SMB connectors
Hi/Lo
-2.0 V to +2.0 V, into a 50 W load
-4.0 V to +4.0 V, into a 1 MW load
Resolution
* Accuracy
0.05 V
Page 4-72
Page 4-72
Within "(0.1 V +5 % of setting)
Rise and fall times (10 % to 90 %),
Typical
0.5 ns (1 V , Hi: +0.5 V, Lo: -0.5 V)
pĆp
1.0 ns (2 V ,Hi: +1 V, Lo: -1 V)
pĆp
2.0 ns (4 V , Hi: +2 V, Lo: -2 V)
pĆp
*Skew between data
330 ps
x 1 ns
1-10
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-13: Digital data out (option 03) (Cont.)
6
Characteristics
Description
PV reference page
Delay
Data to marker
4.4 ns
See Figure 1-2 for T .
d5
Clock to data
3.7 ns
See Figure 1-2 for T .
d6
6
The characteristics are specified at the end of the SMB-BNC cable (012Ć1459Ć00).
Table 1-14: Auxiliary inputs
Characteristics
Description
PV reference page
7
Trigger input
Connector
Impedance
Rear panel BNC connectors
50 W "2 W
1 kW "100 W
Polarity
POS (positive) or NEG (negative)
Input voltage range
"10 V, into a 1 kW load
"5 V, into a 50 W load
Threshold
Level
-5.0 V to 5.0 V
Resolution
0.1 V
* Accuracy
Page **ꢀꢀꢀꢀ**
"(5 % of level + 0.1 V)
Minimum 10 ns, 0.2 V amplitude
Maximum 500 ns
Maximum 1.6 ns
Maximum 32 clocks
30 ns + 1 clock
Pulse width
Trigger dead time
Trigger jitter
Gate jitter
Delay to marker, Typical
See Figure 1-2 for T
d2
Delay to data, Typical
TRIGGER mode
37 ns + 1 clock
See Figure 1-2 for T .
d1
GATE mode
Minimum
Miaximum
45 ns + 358.5 clocks
45 ns + 430.5 clocksĂ
Event trigger input
Connector
9Ćpin, D type on the rear panel
4 bits
Number of events
Input signal
4 event bits and Strobe
1-11
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-14: Auxiliary inputs (Cont.)
Characteristics
Threshold
Description
PV reference page
TTL level
Pulse width
Minimum 64 clocks
0 Vto +5 V(DC + peak AC)
2.2 kW, pullĆup to +5 V
Input voltage range
Impedance
Delay to analog out
x 462.5 clocks + 45 ns
Recovery Time
CH1 ADD input
Connector
Miaximum 500 clock
Rear panel BNC connector
-1 Vto +1 V(DC + peak AC)
50 W
Input voltage range
Impedance
Bandwidth
DC to 200 MHz (-3 dB), 1 VpĆp input
Amplitude accuracy
Page 4-63
"5 %
NOTE: CH1 output cannot exceed "2 V(into a 50 W load).
Reference 10 MHz clock input
Connector
Rear panel BNC connector
Input voltage range
0.2 Vto 3.0 VpĆp (into a 50 W load, AC coupling)
Maximum "10 V
Impedance
Reference frequency
External clock input
Connector
50 W
Page 4-59
10 MHz "0.1 MHz
Rear panel BNC connector
Input voltage range
0.25 V to 1.0 V (into a 50 W load, AC coupling)
pĆp pĆp
Maximum "10 V
50 W
Impedance
Frequency range
Duty ration
10 MHz to 1 GHz
40% to 60%
Page 4-61
Pulse width
Minimum 0.5 ns
7
The characteristics are specified at the end of the BNC cable (012Ć0482Ć00).
1-12
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-15: Funcion GeneratorĂ(FG)
Characteristics
OperationMode
Waveform Shape
Frequency
Amplitude
Range
Description
Continuous mode only
Sine, Triangle, Square, Ramp, Pulse, DC
1.000 Hz to 100.0 MHz
0.020 V to 2.000 V , into a 50 W load
pĆp pĆp
Resolution
Offset
1 mV
Range
-1.000 Vto +1.000 V, into a 50 W load
1 mV
Resolution
DC Level
Range
DC waveform only
-1.000 Vto +1.000 V, into a 50 W load
1 mV
Resolution
Phase
AWG520 only
Range
-360 degree to +360 degree
Resolution
Frequency
Resolution
0.036Ădegree
0.36Ădegree
1.8Ădegree
3.6Ădegree
7.2Ădegree
9.0Ădegree
14.4Ădegree
18.0Ădegree
36.0 degree
1.000ĂHz to 100.0ĂkHz
100.1ĂkHz to 1.000ĂMHz
1.001ĂMHz to 5.000ĂMHz
5.001ĂMHz to 10.00ĂMHz
10.01ĂMHz to 20.00ĂMHz
20.01ĂMHz to 25.00ĂMHz
25.01ĂMHz to 40.00ĂMHz
40.01MHz to 50.00ĂMHz
50.01MHz to 100.0ĂMHz
Polarity
Duty
Normal, Inverted
Pulse waveform only
0.1Ă% to 99.9Ă%
Range
Resolution
Frequency
Resolution
0.1Ă%
0.5Ă%
1.0Ă%
2.0Ă%
2.5Ă%
4.0Ă%
5.0Ă%
10.0Ă%
1.000ĂHz to 1.000MHz
1.001MHz to 5.000ĂMHz
5.001ĂMHz to 10.00ĂMHz
10.01ĂMHz to 20.00ĂMHz
20.01ĂMHz to 25.00ĂMHz
25.01ĂMHz to 40.00ĂMHz
40.01ĂMHz to 50.00ĂMHz
50.01ĂMHz to 100.00ĂMHz
Marker Out
Pulse Width
Mrker1
Hi : 0Ă% to 20Ă% of 1 waveform period
Lo : 20% to 100 % of 1 waveform period
1-13
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-16: Display
Characteristics
Display
Description
Display area
Horizontal
Vertical:
13.2 cm (5.2 inches)
9.9 cm (3.9 inches)
Resolution
640 (H) 480 (V) pixels
Table 1-17: Timer
Characteristics
Timer
Description
Operation life
Type
6 years
Li 3 V, 190 mAh
Table 1-18: AC line power
Characteristics
Rating voltage
Description
100 to 240 VAC
Voltage Range
90 to 250 VAC, continuous range, CAT II
48.0 Hz to 63 Hz (voltage range from 100 VAC to 240 VAC)
AWG510 (Standard) 400 W
Source frequency
Maximum consumption
AWG520
AWG510 (Standard) 5 A
AWG520 8 A
600 W
Maximum current
Fuse rating
10 A FAST, 250 V, UL 198G (3 AG)
5 A (T), 250 V, IEC 127
Table 1-19: Interface connectors
Characteristics
GPIB
Description
24Ćpin, IEEE 488.1 connector on the rear panel
10BASEĆT, RJĆ45 connector on the rear panel
6Ćpin, miniĆDIN connector on the rear panel
Ethernet
Keyboard connector
1-14
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Mechanical Specification
Table 1-20: Mechanical
Characteristics
Net weight
Description
17 kg (37.5 lb) (AWG520)
Dimensions
Height
178 mm (7.0 inches)
194 mm (7.64 inches) with Feet
Width
422 mm (16.6 inches)
434 mm (17.1 inches) with Handle
Length
560 mm (22.0 inches)
602 mm (23.71 inches) with Rear Feet
[mm]
H
Figure 1-1: Dimensions
1-15
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Environmental Specification
Table 1-21: Installation requirement
Characteristics
Heatdissipation
Description
Maximum power
600 W (maximum line current: 8 Arms, at 50 Hz)
Surge Current
30 A (25 _C) peak for equal to or less than 5 line cycles,
after the instrument has been turned off for at least 30s
Cooling clearance
Bottom
2 cm (0.8 inches)
NOTE: The feet on the bottom provides the required
clearance when set on a flat surface.
Sides
Rear
15 cm (6 inches)
7.5 cm (3 inches)
Table 1-22: Environmental
Characteristics
Atmospherics
Temperature
Operating
Description
+10 _C to +40 _C
NonĆoperating
Relative humidity
Operating
-20 _C to +60 _C
20 % to 80 % (no condensation)
Maximum wetĆbulb temperature 29.4 _C
NonĆoperating
5 % to 90 % (no condensation)
Maximum wetĆbulb temperature 40.0 _C
Altitude
Operating
Up to 3 km (10 000 ft)
Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 _C each 300 m (1 000 ft)
above 1.5 km (5 000 ft)
NonĆoperating
Dynamics
Up to 12 km (40 000 ft)
Random vibration
Operating
0.27 g rms, from 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 minutes
2.28 g rms, from 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 minutes
NonĆoperating
Shock
2
NonĆoperating
294 m/s (30 G), halfĆsine, 11 ms duration
1-16
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Certification and Compliances
The certification and compliances for the AWG510 and AWG520 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator are listed in Table 1–23.
Table 1-23: Certifications and compliances
EC declaration of conformity -
EMC
Meets intent of Directive 89/336/EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility. Compliance was
demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the
European Communities:
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC:
EN 55011
Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions
AC Power Line Harmonic Emissions
EN 50081Ć1 Emissions:
EN 61000Ć3Ć2
EN 50082Ć1 Immunity:
EN 61000Ć4Ć2
EN 61000Ć4Ć3
EN 61000Ć4Ć4
EN 61000Ć4Ć5
EN 61000Ć4Ć6
EN 61000Ć4Ć8
EN 61000Ć4Ć11
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity
RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity
Electrical Fast Transient Immunity
Surge Immunity
Conducted Disturbances Induced by RF Fields
Power Frequency Electromagnetic Field
Voltage Dips and Interruption Immunity
EC Declaration of Conformity - Low
Voltage
Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the Official Journal
of the European Communities:
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC
EN 61010Ć1/A2:1995
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measureĆ
ment, control, and laboratory use
FCC compliance
FCC Code of Federal Regulations, 47 CFR, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
Australian/New Zealand declaration of Complies with EMC provision of Radio-communications Act per the following standard:
Conformity Ć EMC
AS/NZS 2064.1/2
Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Equipment: 1992
Approvals
Complies with the following safety standards:
UL3111-1, First Edition
Standard for electrical measuring and test equipment.
CAN/CSA C22.2 No.1010.1Ć92 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control and laboratory use.
1-17
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-23: Certifications and compliances (Cont.)
Installation category Description
Terminals on this product may have different installation (over-voltage) category
designations. The installation categories are:
Category
Examples of products in this category
CAT III
DistributionĆlevel mains (usually permanently connected).
Equipment at this level is typically in a fixed industrial
location
CAT II
CAT I
LocalĆlevel mains (wall sockets). Equipment at this level
includes appliances, portable tools, and similar products.
Equipment is usually cordĆconnected
Secondary (signal level) or battery operated circuits of
electronic equipment
Pollution degree
A measure ofthe contaminates that could occur in the environment around and within a
product. Typically the internal environment inside a product is considered to be the same
as the external. Products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated.
Pollution Degree 2
Normally only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs.
Occasionally a temporary conductivity that is caused by
condensation must be expected. This location is a typical
office/home environment. Temporary condensation occurs
only when the product is out ofservice.
Conditions of Approval
IEC Characteristics
Safety Certifications/Compliances are made for the following conditions:
Altitude (maximum operation): 2000 meters
Equipment type:
Test and Measuring
Installation Category II (as defined in IEC 61010-1, Annex J)
Pollution Degree 2 (as defined in IEC 61010-1)
Safety Class I (as defined in IEC 61010-1, Annex H)
1-18
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Ext. Trigger
Clockto analog (10.6 ns [typ])
(37 ns [tpy] + 1 clk)
T
d1
Analog Out
T
(30 ns [tpy] + 1 clk)
d2
Marker
(Marker skew 32 ps [typ])
T
(4.4 ns [typ])
d5
Digital Out
(D.O skew 330 ps [typ])
T
(3.7 ns [typ])
d6
(Trigger to clock: 20 ns + 1.5 CLK [typ])
T
d7
ClockOut
Figure 1-2: Signal timing
1-19
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
1-20
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Information
This section is divided into following two subsections:
H
H
Preparation for Use. Describes the installation, environmental requirements,
information on how to power on or off, and so on.
Instruction for Operation. Describes the general menu operating information
and Diag/Cal menu structure.
2-1
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Information
2-2
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Use
This subsection describes:
H
H
H
Supplying Operating Power
Operating Environment
Applying and Interrupting Power.
Supplying Operating Power
NOTE. Read all information and heed all warnings in this subsection before
connecting the AWG500 to a power source.
WARNING. AC POWER SOURCE AND CONNECTION. The waveform generator
operates from a single-phase power source. It has a three-wire power cord and
two-pole, three-terminal grounding type plug. The voltage to ground (earth) from
either pole of the power source must not exceed the maximum rated operating
voltage, 250 volts.
Before making connection to the power source, be sure the waveform generator
has a suitable two-pole, three-terminal grounding-type plug.
GROUNDING. This instrument is safety Class 1 equipment (IEC designation).
All accessible conductive parts are directly connected through the grounding
conductor of the power cord to the grounded (earthing) contact of the power
plug.
WARNING. The power input plug must be inserted only in a mating receptacle
with a grounding contact where earth ground has been verified by a qualified
service person. Do not defeat the grounding connection. Any interruption of the
grounding connection can create an electric shock hazard.
For electric shock protection, the grounding connection must be made before
making connection to the instrument’s input or output terminals.
2-3
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Use
Power Cord Information
A power cord with the appropriate plug configuration is supplied with each
AWG500. Table 2–1 gives the color-coding of the conductors in the power cord.
If you require a power cord other than the one supplied, refer to Table 2–2,
Power Cord Identification.
Table 2-1: PowerĆcord conductor identification
Conductor
Color
Alternate Color
Black
Ungrounded (Line)
Grounded (Neutral)
Grounded (Earthing)
Brown
Light Blue
Green/Yellow
White
Green
Table 2-2: Power cord identification
Plug Configuration
Normal Usage
Option Number
North America
125 V
Standard
Europe
230 V
A1
A2
United Kingdom
230 V
Australia
230 V
A3
North America
230 V
A4
A5
Switzerland
230 V
2-4
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Use
Operating Voltage
This AWG500 operates with any line voltage from 100 to 240 VACRMS with any
line frequency from 48 to 63 Hz. There are two fuses, either of which may be
used throughout the line voltage and frequency ranges. (The two fuses are not
interchangeable as each requires a different fuse cap.)
Memory Backup Power
Memory modules with on-board batteries allow the AWG500 to retain some
types of data upon loss of the AC power source. The stored adjustment constants,
saved front-panel settings, current front-panel settings (instrument status), and
in–memory waveform data are retained.
The on-board batteries of the memory modules have a shelf life of about five
years. Partial or total loss of stored settings upon power on may indicate that the
memory module batteries need to be replaced. You must return the modules to an
authorized Tektronix field service facility to replace the batteries and reload
calibration constants.
2-5
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Use
Operating Environment
The following environmental requirements are provided to ensure proper
operation and long instrument life.
Operating Temperature
Operate the waveform generator where the ambient air temperature is from
10_ C to +40_ C with no diskette in the floppy drive. Store the AWG500 in
ambient temperatures from –20_ C to +60_ C with no diskette in the floppy
drive. After storage at temperatures outside the operating limits, allow the chassis
to stabilize to a safe operating temperature before applying power.
Ventilation Requirements
The waveform generator is cooled by air drawn in and exhausted through the
cabinet side panels by an internal fan. To ensure proper cooling of the waveform
generator, allow at least 6 inches (15 cm) clearance on both sides, 0.8 inches (2
cm) on the bottom, and 3 inches (7.5 cm) on the rear of the AWG500. (The feet
on the bottom of the waveform generator provide the required clearance when set
on flat surfaces.)
CAUTION. When the air flow is restricted and the temperature of the DACmodule
surface goes over 80_ C, the AWG500 may temporarily shut down to protect the
internal modules. To prevent temporary shutdown of the AWG500, do not restrict
air flow through the chassis.
In firmware version 1.4 and later, the AWG500 displays the message “Power fail
or out of temperature limit” before shutting down.
If the AWG500 shuts down unexpectedly, improve ventilation around the
AWG500 and wait a few minutes to allow it to cool down; then switch the power
on again.
2-6
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Use
Applying and Interrupting Power
Consider the following information when you power on or power off the
instrument, or when power is interrupted due to an external power failure.
CAUTION. You can not power on the instrument when the ambient temperature
exceeds the instrument temperature operation range. Wait until the instrument
cools down, or the ambient temperature decreases to valid operating temperatu-
res, before turning on the instrument again.
Power On
Upon power on, the waveform generator runs a power-on self check. If it passes,
the AWG500 displays a Pass status message and a prompt to press any key to
continue. If it fails, the AWG500 displays a diagnostic log that identifies the
area(s) that failed and a prompt to press any key to continue. Refer to Section 6,
Maintenance, for information on diagnostics and fault isolation.
Power Off
CAUTION. DO NOT power off the waveform generator when either running a
signal path compensation or when doing any of the adjustments described in
Section 5, Adjustment Procedures. To do so might result in the loss of internally
stored adjustment constants.
In general, do not power off the instrument when doing operations that affect the
data stored in the memory. Wait for the instrument to finish the operation when
doing adjustments, saving waveforms, or saving setups.
Improper power off or unexpected loss of power to the AWG500 can result in
calibration data corruptions on the hard disk.
2-7
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Use
Repackaging Instructions
Use a corrugated cardboard shipping carton having a test strength of at least
375 pounds and with an inside dimension at least six inches greater than the
instrument dimensions.
If the instrument is being shipped to a Tektronix Service Center, enclose the
following information: the owner’s name, address, phone number of a contact
person, type and serial number of the instrument, reason for returning, and a
complete description of the service required.
Seal the shipping carton with an industrial stapler or strapping tape.
Mark the address of the Tektronix Service Center and also your own return
address on the shipping carton in two prominent locations.
Installed Options
Your instrument may be equipped with one or more instrument options. Except
for the line-cord options described in Table 2–2 (on page 2–4 of this section), all
options and optional accessories are listed and described in Section 7, Options.
For further information and prices of instrument options, refer to your Tektronix
Products catalog or contact your Tektronix Field Office.
2-8
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations
This section describes the AWG500-Series Waveform Generator menu system
and numeric and text input methods.
Menu Operations
There are four menu buttons, labeled EDIT, SETUP, APPL, and UTILITY, as
shown in Figure 2–1. Pushing a menu button displays the corresponding screen
and menu buttons. These menus let you edit waveforms, initialize instrument
settings, define instrument operation, and specify waveform output parameters.
You select items within the displayed menu by pushing the bottom or side bezel
button nearest to the menu item. These buttons consist of seven bottom buttons
and five side buttons, as shown in Figure 2–1. These menu bezel buttons are
referred to as bottom menu buttons (or bottom buttons) and side menu buttons
(or side buttons).
The CLEAR MENU button cancels the current menu operation and exits to the
previous instrument state.
Menu buttons
Side menu bezel buttons
(side buttons)
Bottom menu bezel buttons
(bottom buttons)
W
CLEAR MENU button
Figure 2-1: Menu buttons, bezel menu buttons, and the CLEAR MENU button
2-9
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Information
Menu Elements
Pushing a front-panel menu button displays that buttons screen and bottom menu
items. You select a bottom menu item by pushing the button directly below that
menu item.
Pushing a bottom button displays a side menu, pop-up menu, list, or dialog box.
Figures 2–2 through 2–4 show examples of the side menu, pop-up menu and
dialog box, respectively.
Status display
Side menu
Bottom menu
Figure 2-2: Bottom and side menus
You use a side menu button to enter into the side submenu, set a parameter,
perform a feature, or cancel an operation. You can find various type of side
buttons as show in Table 2–3 describing the side menu button types.
2-10
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Information
Table 2-3: Side menu elements
Menu items Descriptions
Menu items Descriptions
Executes the displayed funcĆ
tion immediately.
Cannot be used in the current
instrument state (menu item is
grayed out).
Switches between two paramĆ
eters each time the side button
is pushed.
Allows making selections by
using the general purpose
knob.
Allows entering numeric values
using the numeric buttons or
the general purpose knob.
Displays sub menus. Note that
the label on the item is folĆ
lowed by an ellipsis (...).
A pop-up menu, shown in Figure 2–3, displays a list of choices from which you
make a selection. Use the general purpose knob or the front-panel arrow buttons
to move up or down in the list. Push the OK side button or the ENTER
front-panel button to confirm the selected item.
Figure 2-3: PopĆup menu example
2-11
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Information
A dialog box, shown in Figure 2–4, displays a form in which you make
selections or enter values. Use the front-panel arrow buttons to move in the list
and select items or fields. Use the keypad buttons or the general purpose knob to
change values in selected text/numeric fields or change 1-of-N fields. Push the
OK side button to confirm the dialog box; push the Cancel side button or the
CLEAR MENU button to exit the dialog box without making any changes.
Text/Numeric fields
1ĆofĆN choice
Figure 2-4: Dialog box example
Refer to Numeric Input on page 2–13 and Text Input on page 2–15 for more
information on selecting and entering values in menus and dialog boxes.
2-12
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Information
Numeric Input
You can enter numeric values by using either the numeric keypad or the general
purpose knob. If the side menu item displays a value, you can alter this value
using the general purpose knob or numeric buttons.
Pushing the type of side menu button or selecting a parameter in a pop-up menu
causes the current setting to appear on the right end of the Status Display area as
shown in Figure 2–5.
Knob icon
Underscore
Figure 2-5: Knob icon displayed in Status Display Area
The General Purpose
Knob
A knob icon with a numeric value that includes an underscore character indicates
that you can change the value by using the general purpose knob or keypad
buttons.
If the numeric value has the knob icon, but does not have the underscore, then
turning the general purpose knob cycles through a predefined set of values.
By default, the underscore character is positioned under the digit specified
depending on the parameters. You can only change the value represented by the
digits at and to the left of the underscore. Use the a and ' arrow buttons to move
the underscore to the desired position and then turn the general purpose knob to
change the value.
When using the general purpose knob, values you change in side menus and
menu screens take effect immediately: values in pop-up menus are not effective
until you push the OK side button or the ENTER front-panel button.
2-13
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Information
The Numeric Keypad
Figure 2–6 shows the numeric keypad, with descriptions of the button opera-
tions.
The SHIFT button enters a character
labeled in blue. Push the SHIFT button
and then push the keypad button.
The CLR button
deletes all characters
in the current field.
The ENTER button
enters the current value
into the instrument.
The DELETE button deletes the
character to the left of the caret.
Figure 2-6: Keypad buttons
The G, M, k, m, m, n, and p buttons are for entering measurement units.
The A, B, C, D, E, and F buttons are used for entering hexadecimal values.
To use the numeric keypad to enter a value, position the caret to where you want
to change a value and then push a keypad button. If you want to enter a unit
value labeled in blue just above each numeric button, push or hold down the
SHIFT button and then push the corresponding numeric button.
To enter or change more than one character, move the caret to the next position
to change. When you are done entering values, push the ENTER button to
confirm the changes and enter them into the instrument. For example, to enter
200.5 ms, push 2, 0, 0, ., 5, m (SHIFT + 4),and ENTER.
When you enter a value larger than the maximum value in the range for the
parameter, the parameter will be set to the maximum value. As the same fashion,
when you enter a value smaller than the minimum value, the minimum value
will be set in the parameter. To set to the maximum or minimum value, enter a
great larger value or smaller value. This is useful when you do not know the
range that can be set.
2-14
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Information
Note that the current unit is always kept when you just use the ENTER after
entering digits. For example, suppose that the Clock is currently set to 100.0
MS/s. When you press 5, 0 and ENTER buttons in this order, the Clock will be
set to 50.0 MS/s. To set to 500 kS/s, press 0, ., 5 and ENTER buttons, or 5, 0, 0,
SHIFT, and 8 buttons in this order.
Text Input
When you need to assign a name to a waveform file or equation, or a IP address
to the instrument, the instrument displays the text dialog boxes, shown in
Figure 2–7. The text field is where you enter or change an existing character
string. The character palette is where you select alphanumeric characters to insert
into the text field. You can also select equation or file names from the name list
to insert into the text field.
Underscore
character
Text field
Characterpalette
Name list
Text field
Characterpalette
Text field
Figure 2-7: Three type of Input text dialog boxes
2-15
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Information
To select a character from the character palette, use the general purpose knob to
highlight a character and then push the ENTER to insert the character into the
text field at the location of the character underscore. Repeat this step until you
have entered all characters in the text field. By default, the character palette is
selected. To select text from a file name list, use the y and b arrow buttons to
move the knob icon to the file name list. Table 2–4 describes all the controls you
can use for entering and editing textual input.
Table 2-4: Text input button functions
Control
Description
General purpose knob
Selects the character to insert into the text field.
Moves the character insertion caret left or right in the text field.
a and ' arrow buttons
ENTER button
button
Inserts the selected character or character string into the text field.
Deletes one character to the left of the caret.
Clears the entire text field.
CLR button
Numeric buttons
SHIFT button
Enters numeric characters into the text field.
Enters a selected character in upper case. When you push the
SHIFT button, the SHIFT LED lights. When the dialog box
disappears, the SHIFT LED also goes off.
2-16
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Information
Shortcut Controls
Figure 2–8 shows the shortcut buttons and knobs that control specific instrument
setup parameters. Using the shortcut controls lets you adjust the output setup
parameters even while you are displaying another menu. Table 2–5 describes the
shortcut controls.
Figure 2-8: Shortcut controls
Table 2-5: Shortcut control descriptions
Controls
Descriptions
VERTICAL
Displays the Vertical side menu. This is the same operation as
selecting SETUP (front)! Vertical (bottom).
Adjusts the vertical offset parameters. This is the same as selecting
SETUP (front)! Vertical (bottom)! Offset (side), and then turning the
general purpose knob.
Adjusts the amplitude parameters. This is the same as selecting
SETUP (front)! Vertical (bottom)! Amplitude (side), and then turning
the general purpose knob.
HORIZONTAL
Displays the Horizontal side menu. This is the same as selecting
SETUP (front)! Horizontal (bottom).
Shifts data in the area specified by the area cursor. This control can be
used only for the quick editing. Refer to Quick Editing in the user
nmanual for more details on quick editing.
2-17
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Information
Table 2-5: Shortcut control descriptions (cont.)
Controls
Descriptions
Adjusts the clock setting. This is the same as selecting SETUP
(front)! Horizontal (bottom)! Clock (side), and then turning the
general purpose knob.
TRIGGER
Displays the Trigger side menu. This is the same as selecting
SETUP (front)! Trigger (bottom).
Adjusts the trigger level setting. This is the same as selecting
SETUP (front)! Trigger (bottom)! Level (side), and then turning the
general purpose knob.
File Management
The AWG500-Series Waveform Generator uses numerous file formats to hold
different types of data. These file types are listed in Table 2–6. Note that the
instrument checks the file format when reading and processes the file based on
its content, regardless of the file extension.
Table 2-6: AWG500ĆSeries Waveform Generator file types
Extensions Files
Description
.WFM
Waveform file
Contains waveform data. All signal data must be in
waveform format before it can be output. Created with the
waveform editor, by compiling an equation file, or when
importing waveforms from external equipment.
.PAT
Pattern file
Contains digital pattern data. Created with the pattern editor.
.SEQ
Sequence file
Contains waveform sequence and trigger data. Created with
the sequence editor.
.EQU
Equation file
Contains equations that describe a waveform. Created with
the equation/text editor.
.TXT
.SET
Text file
Contains ASCII text. Created with the equation/text editor.
Setup file
Contains instrument setup and configuration data. Created
from the SETUP menu.
Locating Files
There are three locations for storing waveform data on the AWG500-Series
Waveform Generator: the instrument hard disk drive, the instrument floppy disk
drive, or a remote storage device accessible through the Ethernet interface. If the
file you want to load is not on the current drive, use the EDIT main screen Drive
2-18
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Information
and Directory bottom menu buttons to open side menus that let you change the
current drive location. Table 2–7 describes the Drive and Directory bottom
buttons.
Table 2-7: Drive and Directory menus
Bottom
menu
Side menu
Description
Drive
Main
Floppy
Net1
Net2
Net3
Changes the instrument current drive. To select a drive,
push the appropriate side menu button. Note that there must
be a floppy disk inserted in the instrument floppy disk drive
inorder to select the floppy drive.
Note that the label Net1, Net2 and Net3 vary depending on
the net name settings in the UTILITY menu.
Directory
Up Level
Moves you up a directory level.
DownLevel
Moves you downa directory level. To move downa directory
level, select a directory name in the popĆup list and then
push the Down Level side button. The filename list changes
to show the contents of the directory.
Creates a directory at the current level. To create a directory,
push the Make Directory side buttonto display the Input
New Directory Name dialog box. Enter the directory name in
the name field, then push the OK side button. The
instrument creates the new directory.
Make Directory
NOTE. In the following procedures, you may have to push the EDIT button twice
to quit the editor. When the instrument does not display the file list, push the
EDIT button again. If you are prompted, refer to Saving FIles on page 2–21.
Copying Files
Copying files is done from the EDIT menu screen. Do the following steps to
copy a file:
1. Push EDIT (front). The instrument displays the file list.
2. Select the file to copy.
3. Push File (bottom)! Copy (side)
4. Enter the new name for the copied file in the file name field
5. Push OK (side). The file is copied and renamed.
2-19
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Information
Renaming Files
Renaming files is done from the EDIT menu screen. Do the following steps to
rename a file:
1. Push EDIT (front). The instrument displays the file list.
2. Select the file to rename.
3. Push File (bottom)! Rename (side)
4. Enter the new name for the file in the file name field
5. Push OK (side). The file is renamed.
Deleting Files
Deleting files is done from the EDIT menu screen. Do the following steps to
delete a file:
1. Push EDIT (front). The instrument displays the file list.
2. Select the file to delete.
3. Push File (bottom)! Delete (side). The instrument displays a message box
asking you to confirm deleting the file.
4. Push OK (side) to delete the file, or Cancel to cancel the operation and keep
the file.
You can also delete all files on the current drive and directory by doing the
following steps:
1. Push EDIT (front)! File (bottom)! Delete All (side). The instrument
displays a message box asking you to confirm deleting all files.
2. Push OK (side) to delete all files, or Cancel to cancel the operation and keep
all files.
Read Only Attribute
You can change an attribute: read only or read/write on a file. Do the following
steps to change the file attribute:
1. Push EDIT (front). The instrument displays the file list.
2. Select the file to change the attribute.
3. Push File (bottom)! Attribute xxxx (side). The xxxx is Read/Write or
Read Only that is the attribution of the selected file. Pushing this side
button causes to immediately change the file attribute.
The file with read only attribute is marked by
Figure 2–9.
, and the directory by
. See
2-20
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Information
Directory with read only
File with read only
Attribute
side button
Figure 2-9: Files and directories with read only attribute
Saving Files
File saving is done from within each editor screen. You have the choice of saving
your waveform data to the current file name or to a new file name. To save a
waveform to its current file name, push File (bottom)! Save (pop-up)!
OK (side).
If you are saving a waveform for the first time, the instrument opens the Input
Filename dialog box, shown in Figure 2–10. Use this dialog box to enter a file
name. If necessary, you can select a different storage media or directory by
pushing the Drive... side menu button. When you are done entering the file
name, push the OK side button or the ENTER front-panel button to close the
dialog box and save the file.
Figure 2-10: Input Filename dialog box
2-21
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Information
NOTE. When you exit an editor without saving edited data, the instrument
displays the message Save the changes you made?. Push the Yes side button to
save the waveform data.
To save waveform data to a new file name, push File (bottom)! Save As
(pop-up)! OK (side). The instrument opens the Input Filename dialog box,
shown in Figure 2–10. Use this dialog box to enter a file name. If necessary, you
can select a storage media or directory by pushing the Drive... side menu button.
When you are done entering the file name, push the ENTER front-panel button
to close the dialog box and save the file.
If you are saving a file with a record length larger than 256 data points and the
record is not evenly divisible by four, the instrument needs to adjust the record
length to meet internal memory record length requirements. The instrument
displays one of the messages shown in Table 2–8. You can push the OK side
button to accept the recommended change, or cancel the save and then edit the
file to satisfy the data record length requirements.
Table 2-8: Waveform record length adjustment messages
Message
Descriptions
Leave asit is
Append 0
The data is saved, as it is, without making changes.
With Level-0 data added after the data, a file with a data length meeting
the requirementsiscreated.
Expand
With the waveform data expanded, a file with a data length meeting the
requirementsiscreated.
Expand with Clock
With the waveform data expanded, a file with a data length meeting the
requirementsiscreated. In addition, the clock frequency increases
without change in scaling factor. The settings are saved in the file.
Repeat
With repetitionsof the original data linked, a file with a data length
meeting the requirementsiscreated. If the total length of the linked data
exceeds4M points, thiswill cause an error.
2-22
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theory of Operation
This section describes the electrical operation of the AWG510 and AWG520
Arbitrary Waveform Generator of the major circuit blocks or modules. Refer to
Figure 9–1 while reading this text.
Module Overview
The AWG510 and AWG520 are portable dual–channel waveform generator
(differential for the AWG510 and single–ended for the AWG520). The waveform
generator reads the digital waveform data loaded into its waveform memory. The
point rate clock determines the rate at which the data is read. The waveform
generator converts the data from digital to analog format and outputs the
resulting arbitrary waveform.
Clock and Trigger
(A40, Clock Board)
The Clock board provides the clock and trigger signals for the A50 AWG board.
The VCO generates the clock source signal. The frequency is controlled by DDS
and PLL circuitry. The point rate clock is adjustable from 50 kHz to 1 GHz for
reading data from the internal waveform memory. The reference clock is
supplied from either the internal 10 MHz TCXO or the Reference Clock Input on
the rear panel.
The trigger signal is sent to the AWG board from the internal interval timer or
the Trigger Input on the rear panel.
WaveformGeneration
(A50, AWG Board)
This functional block is a core of the waveform generator. It receives system
clocks from the Clock board to generate analog signal that is sent to the Output
board.
The AWG board contains sequence circuitry and memory, waveform memory
boards, shift registers, clock control circuitry, 1 GHz DAC, interface for the
Clock board and the Output board, and optional digital data out circuitry.
Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC). This functional block is a 10-bit high-speed
digital-to-analog converter. It converts the digital data from the waveform
memory into analog signals.
WaveformMemory
This functional block contains RAM memory that holds waveform data, address
latch registers, and read/write control circuitry. There are 10 bits for waveform
data and 2 bits for markers.
(A60, Memory Board)
3-1
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theory of Operation
Analog Processing
This functional block amplifies the DAC analog signals to the specified output
level. The input signals may pass through the low–pass filters and attenuators in
this block. If an offset is specified, the Offset circuitry will add it. This board
also has an adder circuitry for adding the signal from the A75 Noise Generator
board or the Add Input on the rear panel to the output waveform.
(A71/A72, Analog Output
Board)
The output waveforms are supplied at two BNC connectors on the front panel
with 50 W impedance (AWG510: CH 1 normal and CH 1 invert. AWG520: CH 1
and CH2).
Noise Generation
(A75, Noise Generator
Board)
This block is in the Output block and generates noise for adding to CH 1, CH 1,
or the external output.
CPU Unit
The CPU Unit has four slots and contains the CPU module, a hard disk and a
flash disk, the Ethernet LAN and GPIB interface cards, and a backplane.
Backplane. The backplane has four ISA bus slots. This board receives power
from Power Supply and sends it to each card board. Commands are also
transmitted via the backplane.
CPU module. The first slot of the CPU Unit has the CPU module that contains the
Intel DX4 (100 MHz) CPU and system RAM (64 MB SIMM).
The CPU module directs operation of all internal circuits based on the front
panel control and commands received over the GPIB interface. It also generates
and sends vertical (VSYNC) and horizontal (HSYNC) sync signals to the tube
assembly.
Hard disk/Flash disk. The second slot of the CPU Unit has a flash disk for storing
the waveform generator firmware and 1.4 GB hard disk for mass storage. They
are fixed with brackets and don’t use ISA bus.
LAN Interface Card. The third slot of the CPU Unit has the Ethernet LAN
interface card. It controls Ethernet communication in LAN environment. The
waveform generator has a 10BASE–T connector on the rear panel.
3-2
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theory of Operation
A30, GPIB Board. The fourth slot of the CPU Unit has the General Purpose
Interface Bus (GPIB) interface driver, which controls communication with
external devices over the parallel interface. The GPIB connector is on the rear
panel.
The GPIB Board also has the bus that sends the control signals to the Clock,
AWG, and Analog Output board.
User Interface
(A10/A11, Connector
Board)
The Connector board receives control signals for the display, floppy disk, and
front panel from the CPU Unit and sends them to each module. This board also
has the fan control circuitry.
Monitor Display
The monitor display consists of a raster scan CRT and its driver. This receives
the sync and video signal from the CPU module. The monitor displays video on
a 17.8 cm (7 in.) CRT screen. The display resolution is 480 640 pixels.
Front Panel
The CPU module sends instructions to and receives information from the
front-panel processor on the A20 Front Panel Board. The front-panel processor
reads the front-panel switches and potentiometers. Any changes in their settings
are reported to the processor system. The front-panel processor also turns the
LEDs on and off and generates the bell signal.
(A20, Front Panel Board)
Floppy Disk Drive
Keyboard
The 1.44 MB 3.5-inch floppy disk drive supports 2HD MS–DOS format.
The ASCII 101 key or JIS 106 key keyboard can be used through 6–pin
mini–DIN connector on the rear panel.
Low Voltage Power Supply
Unit
The low voltage power supply provides +5 V, +8 V, +12 V, +24 V, –2 V, –4.6 V,
and –8 V for all of the circuitry in the waveform generator. It also has an AC
inlet, fuse, and the principal POWER switch on the rear panel.
The principal POWER switch controls all power to the waveform generator
including the Low Voltage Power Supply. The ON/STBY switch, located on the
front panel, also controls all of the power to the waveform generator except for
part of the circuitry in the Low Voltage Power Supply.
Fan
Three brushless DC fans on the left (floppy disk) side provide forced air cooling
for the waveform generator The fan control circuitry on the A10/A11 Connector
board controls power to the fans sensing the temperature in the cabinet.
3-3
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theory of Operation
Digital Data Out Option 03
The Digital Data Out option (03) directly outputs the digital data in the
waveform memory without passing it through the digital-to-analog converter.
This option is installed on the AWG board.
For more information about options, refer to section 7, Option.
3-4
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Two types of Performance Verification procedures can be performed on this
product: SelfTests and Performance Tests. You may not need to perform all of
these procedures, depending on what you want to accomplish.
H
To rapidly confirm that the Waveform Generator functions and was adjusted
properly, just do the Self Tests, which begin on page 4–3.
Advantages: These procedures require minimal additional time to perform,
require no additional equipment, and more completely test the internal
hardware of the Waveform Generator. They can be used to quickly determine
if the waveform generator is suitable for putting into service, such as when it
is first received.
H
If more extensive confirmation of performance is desired, do the Perfor-
mance Tests, beginning on page 4–12, after doing the Self Tests just
referenced.
Advantages: These procedures add direct checking of warranted specifica-
tions. They require more time to perform and suitable test equipment is
required. (Refer to Equipment Required on page 4–13).
Conventions
Throughout these procedures the following conventions apply:
H
Each test procedure uses the following general format:
Title of Test
Equipment Required
Prerequisites
Procedure
4-1
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
H
Each procedure consists of as many steps, substeps, and subparts as required
to do the test. Steps, substeps, and subparts are sequenced as follows:
1. First Step
a. First Substep
H
H
First Subpart
Second Subpart
b. Second Substep
2. Second Step
H
H
Instructions for menu selection on follow this format: FRONT PANEL
BUTTON! Main Menu Button! Side Menu Button. For example, “Push
UTILITY! System! Reset to Factory! OK”
In steps and substeps, the lead-in statement in italics instructs you what to
do, while the instructions that follow tell you how to do it, as in the example
step below, “Initialize the AWG500-Series Waveform Generator controls”
by doing “Push UTILITY (front panel)! System (bottom)! Reset to
Factory (side)! OK (side). Now, push the front panel menu button...”.
H
Where instructed to use a front-panel button or knob, or select from a bottom
or side menu, the name of the button or knob appears in boldface type: “push
EDIT; then Drive..., push Floppy side button and use the knob to select the
waveform file SINE.WFM from the file list.”
STOP. The symbol at the left is accompanied by information you must read to do
the procedure properly.
4-2
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Self Tests
The Self Tests use internal routines to confirm basic functionality and proper
adjustment. No test equipment is required to do these test procedures.
The self tests include these internal routines:
H
H
Diagnostics
This self-test procedure uses internal routines to verify that the instrument
functions, and passes the internal circuit tests.
Calibration
The second procedure checks the instrument internal calibration constants
and changes them if needed.
Diagnostics
This procedure uses internal routines to verify that the instrument functions and
was adjusted properly. No test equipment or hookups are required.
The instrument automatically performs the internal diagnostics at power-on; you
can also run the internal diagnostics using the menu selections described in this
procedure. The difference between these two methods of initiating the diagnos-
tics is that the menu method does more detailed memory checking than the
power-on method.
Equipment
required
None
Prerequisites
Power on the instrument and allow a twentyĆminute warmup period
before doing this procedure.
1. Confirm that no output is performed: Confirm that the RUN LED does not
light. If not, push the RUN button so that the RUN LED goes off.
2. Verify that internal diagnostics pass: Do the following substeps to verify
passing of internal diagnostics.
a. Display the diagnostics menu and select all tests:
H
Push UTILITY (front panel)! Diag (bottom)! Diagnostic All
(side).
H
If All is not displayed, select All using the general purpose knob.
The screen as shown in Figure 4–1 appears.
4-3
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
The list on the screen shows the test items and results in the calibration
and diagnostics previously made. For the diagnostics, in addition to
selecting all of the test items shown on the screen, you can select only a
test item that you want to run using the general purpose knob. The result
of the diagnostics are shown as error code. Pass means that the tests have
been made without error. If an error is detected, error code is displayed.
You can also specify how many times the diagnostic tests are performed.
Push the Cycle side button and then turn the general purpose knob to
select the cycle from 1, 3, 10, 100 or Infinite. When you select Infinite,
the tests are repeatedly performed, and are not be terminated until you
push the Abort Diagnostic side button.
Figure 4-1: Diagnostic menu
b. Run the diagnostics: Push the Execute Diagnostic side button. This
executes all the AWG500 diagnostics automatically.
c. Wait: The internal diagnostics do an extensive verification of AWG500
functions. While this verification progresses, the screen displays the
clock icon. When finished, the resulting status appears on the screen.
d. Confirm that no failures are found: Verify that no failures are found and
reported on-screen. If the diagnostics terminates without error, Pass is
displayed instead of the - - -. If a value is displayed, meaning an error is
detected, consult a qualified service technician for further assistance.
4-4
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
See Table 4–1 for details on error codes.
3. Return to regular service: Push any bottom or menu button (other than
UTILITY) to exit the diagnostic screen.
Calibration
The instrument includes internal calibration routines that check electrical
characteristics such as offset, attenuations and filters. Perform calibration to
adjust internal calibration constants as necessary. This procedure describes how
to do the internal calibration.
Equipment
required
None
Prerequisites
Power on the instrument and allow a 20 minute warmup period at an
ambient temperature between +20_ C and +30_ C before doing this
procedure.
1. Confirm that no output is performed: Confirm that the RUN LED does not
light. If not, push the RUN button so that the RUN LED goes off.
NOTE. When you start calibration while the output is being performed, some
calibration items may be failed.
2. Verify that internal adjustments pass: Do the following substeps to verify
passing of internal adjustments.
a. Run the adjustments routine: Push UTILITY (front panel)! Diag
(bottom)! Execute Calibration (side). This executes the AWG500
calibration routines automatically.
b. Wait: The internal calibration does an exhaustive verification of proper
AWG500 function. While this verification progresses, the message box
displaying Executing Calibration appear on screen. When finished, the
resulting status will appear in the message box as shown in Figure 4–2.
4-5
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Figure 4-2: Calibration result message box
c. Confirm that no failures are found: Verify that no failures are found and
reported in the message box. If the calibration displays Fail as the result,
consult a qualified service technician for further assistance.
3. Return to regular service: Push the OK side button and then any bottom or
menu button (other than the UTILITY) to exit the diag screen.
NOTE. When the instrument is powered off while the calibrations is executed, the
calibration data in the memory may be loss.
4-6
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Table 4-1: Diagnostic categories and error codes
Categories
Error codes
Descriptions
System
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
Bios test error
Realtime clock power fail
CMOS checksum fail
FDD missing fail
Memory size fail
Flash disk fail
Date and time fail
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114
2115
2116
Front panel test error
Configuration fail
Communication fail
RAM fail
ROM fail
AD fail
Timer fail
2300
2301
A30 board test error
Unrecognized A30 board
2400
2401
2402
Clock delay data test error
Not found
Checksum fail
2700
2701
2702
Cal data test error
Uncaled
Checksum fail
Run mode
3100
CTRL1 registers test error
BIT0 to BIT3 fail (BIT0: 3101)
3101 to 3104
3200
3250
3300
3350
4100
Event table memory data bus error
DATA00 to DATA15 fail (DATA00: 3201)
3201 to 3216
3251 to 3274
3301 to 3302
3351 to 3352
Event table address bus error
ADD00 to ADD23 fail (ADD00: 3251)
Event table CS test error
CS0 to CS1 fail (CS0: 3301)
Event memory cell test error
CHIP0 to CHIP1 fail (CHIP0: 3351)
Clock
A40 clock board test error
4101
4102
4103
4104
PLL unlock check at 500 MHz faile
PLL lock check at 630 MHz fail
PLL lock check at 1350 MHz fail
PLL unlock check at 1500 MHz fail
4-7
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Table 4-1: Diagnostic categories and error codes (Cont.)
Categories
Error codes
Descriptions
Sequence Memory
5100
Data bus test error
5101 to 5116
DATA00 to DATA15 fail (DATA00: 5101)
5150
5200
5250
5300
5350
5400
Address bus test error
ADD00 to ADD23 fail (ADD00: 5151)
5151 to 5174
5201 to 5206
5251 to 5256
5301 to 5316
5351 to 5374
5401 to 5464
CS test error
CS0 to CS7 fail (CS0: 5201)
Cell test error
CHIP0 to CHIP5 (CHIP0: 5501)
Waveform memory (CH1)
Data bus test error
DATA00 to DATA15 fail (DATA00: 5301)
Address bus test error
ADD00 to ADD13 fail (ADD00: 5351)
Module test error
Refer to Finding Faulty Modules on page
4-10 for detail.
5500
Cell test error
Refer to Finding Faulty Modules on page
4-10 for detail.
5501 to 5549
Waveform memory
(CH1 or CH2)
5600
5650
5700
Data bus test error
5601 to 5616
5651 to 5674
5701 to 5764
DATA00 to DATA15 fail (DATA00: 5601)
Address bus test error
ADD00 to ADD23 fail (ADD00: 5651)
Module test error
Refer to Finding Faulty Modules on page
4-10 for detail.
5800
Cell test error
Refer to Finding Faulty Modules on page
4-10 for detail.
5801 to 5849
ARB DAC (CH1)
5900
5950
ARB DAC test error
5901 to 5912
5951 to 5962
DATA00 to DATA11 fail (DATA00: 5901)
ARB DAC (CH1 or CH2)
ARB DAC test error
DATA00 to DATA11 fail (DATA00: 5951)
4-8
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Table 4-1: Diagnostic categories and error codes (Cont.)
Categories
Error codes
Descriptions
Output (CH1)
7110
7111
Output offset device test error
Output offset fail
7120
7121
Internal offset device test error
Internal offset fail
7130
7131
ARB gain test error
ARB gain fail
7140
7141
7142
7143
7144
ATTEN test error
X3dB attenuator fail
X6dB attenuator fail
X12dB attenuator fail
X20dB attenuator fail
7150
7151
7152
7153
7154
Filter test error
10 MHz filter fail
20 MHz filter fail
50 MHz filter fail
100 MHz filter fail
7170
7171
OUTPUT ON key test error
OUTPUT ON key fail
Output (CH1 or CH2)
7210
7211
Output offset device test error
Output offset fail
7220
7221
Internal offset device test error
Internal offset fail
7230
7231
ARB gain test error
ARB gain fail
7240
7241
7242
7243
7244
ATTEN test error
X3dB attenuator fail
X6dB attenuator fail
X12dB attenuator fail
X20dB attenuator fail
7250
7251
7252
7253
7254
Filter test error
10 MHz filter fail
20 MHz filter fail
50 MHz filter fail
100 MHz filter fail
7270
7271
OUTPUT ON key test error
OUTPUT ON key fail
4-9
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Finding Faulty Modules
Table 4–2 shows the module test error code examples. The error code composes
of 54XX and 57XX, which corresponds to J7XX and J6XX modules and to
J12XX and J11XX, respectively. The lower two digits (XX) indicates the
possible faulty module, whose lower 6 bits correspond to the modules as shown
in Table 4–2.
The 1 in the table indicates a possible faulty module. For example, the 1s are
placed in the J620 and J610 columns for the line of the error code 5406. The
lower two–digit 06 is driven from the binary bit array 000110, which means that
the J620 and/or J610 can be faulty.
Table 4-2: Module test error code examples
Possibly faulty modules
Error code
5406
J720
0
J710
0
J700
0
J620
1
J610
1
J600
0
5407
0
0
0
1
1
1
5448
1
1
0
0
0
0
5456
1
1
1
0
0
0
Possibly faulty modules
Error code
5706
J1220
J1210
J1200
J1120
J1110
J1100
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
5707
5748
5756
Table 4–3 shows the matrix of faulty modules and memory cells driven from the
lower two digits in the memory cell test error code. The J6XX and J7XX
modules correspond to the error code 55XX, and the J11XX and J12XX modules
correspond to the error code 58XX. If an error code is displayed, first you find a
lower two–digits in the table, and then find a faulty module included in the
corresponding column and a memory cell included in the corresponding line.
For example, if the error code 5827 is displayed, the J1200 module and/or U120
memory cell can be indicated as a faulty.
4-10
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Table 4-3: Waveform memory cell test errors
Faulty modules
J600
J1100
01
J610
J1110
09
J620
J1120
17
J700
J1200
25
J710
J1210
33
J720
J1220
41
Faulty memory
cell
U100
U110
U120
U130
U140
U150
U160
U170
02
10
18
26
34
42
03
11
19
27
35
43
04
12
20
28
36
44
05
13
21
29
37
45
06
14
22
30
38
46
07
15
23
31
39
47
08
16
24
32
40
48
4-11
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Performance Tests
This section contains a collection of procedures for checking that the
AWG500–Series Waveform Generator performance as warranted.
The procedures are arranged in fifteen logical groupings, presented in the
following order:
Table 4-4: Performance test items
See (performance
verification)
See
(specifications)
Titles
Test items
Operating mode tests
Page 4-23
Continuous, Triggered, and Gated
mode normality
Clock frequency tests
Page 4-30
Clock frequency accuracy
Page 1-5
Page 1-6
Amplitude and offset accuracy tests (normal out) Page 4-32
Amplitude accuracy, and DC offset
accuracy
Amplitude, DC offset and rise time accuracy
tests (direct DA out)
Page 4-36
Page 4-40
Page 4-43
Amplitude accuracy, DC offset accuraĆ Page 1-7
cy and Rise time accuracy
Pulse response tests
Rise time accuracy, Abberation, and
Flatness
Page 1-6
Sine wave tests
Harmonics level accuracy, and Noise
level accuracy
Page 1-6
Internal trigger tests
Trigger input tests
Page 4-45
Page 4-47
Trigger interval normality
Page 1-5
Trigger level accuracy, and Trigger
function normality
Page 1-11
Event input and enhanced mode tests
10 MHz reference input tests
page 4-52
Page 4-59
External event input function normality,
and
Event mode normality
Reference input normality, and
clock output frequency accuracy
Page 1-12
Page 1-12
External clock input tests
Add input tests
Page 4-61
Page 4-63
External clock input normality
Add input function normality, and Input Page 1-12
level accuracy
Marker output tests
Page 4-65
Page 4-69
Page 4-72
Marker output level accuracy
Marker delay function
Page 1-8
Page 1-8
Page 1-10
Marker delay tests
Digital data output tests (Option 03 only)
High and low level accuracies,
Output period accuracy, and Skew
Clock output tests
Noise output tests
Page 4-76
Page 4-78
Clock output normality
Noise level accuracy
Page 1-8
Page 1-9
They check all the characteristics that are designated as checked in Specifica-
tions. (The characteristic items that must be checked are listed with the asterisk
(*) in Specifications).
4-12
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
STOP. These procedures extend the confidence level provided by the basic
procedures described on page 4–3. The basic procedures should be done first,
then these procedures performed if desired.
Prerequisites
The tests in this section comprise an extensive, valid confirmation of perfor-
mance and functionality when the following requirements are met:
H
H
The cabinet must be installed on the instrument.
You must have performed and passed the procedures under Self Tests, found
on page 4–3.
H
The waveform generator must have been last adjusted at an ambient
temperature between +20_ C and +30_ C, must have been operating for a
warm-up period of at least 20 minutes, and must be operating at an ambient
temperature between +10_ C and +40_ C.
Related Information
Equipment Required
Read Conventions on page 4–1.
These procedures use external, traceable signal sources to directly check
warranted characteristics. The required equipment list follows this introduction.
Table 4-5: Test equipments
Item number and
description
Minimum requirements
Example (recommended)
Purpose
1. Frequency Counter
2. Digital multi meter
3. Oscilloscope
1 MHz to 100 MHz,
Accuracy: t 0.2 ppm
Anritu MF1603A
Used to check reference input
test.
DC volts range: 0.05 V to 10 V,
Accuracy: "0.1 %
Fluke 8842A
Used to check to measure
voltage.
Bandwidth: u 500 MHz, 1 MW and
Tektronix TDS784C
Tektronix TDS820
Checks output signals. Used
in many procedures.
50 W inputs
4. Oscilloscope
Bandwidth: u 1 GHz,
Checks direct DA rise time.
Rise time: t 350 ps, 50 W input
5. Spectrum Analizer
6. Function Generator
1 KHz to 1 GHz
Tektronix 497P or
Advantest R4131
Checks output signals.
Output voltage: -5 V to +5 V,
Frequency accuracy: t 0.01 %
Tektronix AFG310
Generates external input
signals. Used in many input
signal test procedures.
7. Signal Generator
Output voltage: u 0.25 V
,
HP 8648x , x: B or D
Used to check external clock
input.
p-p
Frequency: u 1 GHz
8. BNC Coaxial Cable
(3 required)
50 W, male to male BNC connectors
Tektronix part number
012Ć0482Ć00
Signal interconnection
4-13
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Table 4-5: Test equipments (cont.)
Item number and
description
Minimum requirements
Example (recommended)
Purpose
9. SMB to BNC Coaxial
Cable (2 required)
50 W, male SMB to male BNC
connectors
Tektronix part number
012Ć1459Ć00
Signal interconnection
10. BNC to N Connector
Male BNC to female N
Tektronix part number
103Ć0045Ć00
Signal interconnection
Signal interconnection
Signal interconnection
DC block
11. BNCĆTConnector
Mail BNC to female BNC to female
BNC
Tektronix part number
103Ć0030Ć00
12. DualĆBanana Connector Female BNC to dual banana
Tektronix part number
103Ć0090Ć00
13. DC block
N type, 50 W
Tektronix part number
015Ć0509Ć00
14. Adapter
SMA (male) to BNC (female), 50 W
50 W, 0.1 %, BNC
Tektronix part number
015Ć1018Ć00
Checks direct DA rise time.
Signal termination
15. Precision Terminator
Tektronix part number
011Ć0129Ć00
16. Performance check disk Must use example listed
Supplied with the product,
Tektronix part number
063Ć2983Ć00
Used to provide waveform
files
17. Ground closure (loopĆ
back cable) with 9Ćpin,
DĆtype connector
Custom,
See Figure 4-3.
Used for event mode test
Dip switch
Switch ID sym
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
STROBE
3 (Event Signal)
2 (Event Signal)
1 (Event Signal)
0 (Event Signal)
Signal Ground (GND)
Signal Ground (GND)
Signal Ground (GND)
Signal Ground (GND)
5
4
3
2
1
6
7
8
9
10
SW5
SW4
SW3
SW2
SW1
1
2
3
4
5
4
3
2
1
9Ćpin, DĆtype,
male connector
5
9
8
7
6
6
7
8
9
Figure 4-3: EVENT IN connector pins and signals and ground closure connector with 9Ćpin DĆtype connector
4-14
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Loading Files
The following steps explain how to load files from the Performance Check/Ad-
justment disk (063-2983-XX) into waveform memory and/or sequence memory.
1. Insert the disk into the Waveform Generator floppy disk drive.
2. Select SETUP (front)! Waveform/Sequence (bottom)! Load... (side)!
Drive... (side) to display the Select Drive dialog box. The dialog box is as
show in Figure 4–4.
3. Select Floppy from the dialog box with the general purpose knob, and then
push the OK side button.
The Select Drive dialog box disappears and the files in the floppy disk are
listed up on the Select File dialog box.
4. With the general purpose knob, select a file to be loaded from the dialog box,
and then push the OK side button.
The waveform or sequence you selected is loaded into the instrument, and
the instrument is also setup with the parameters stored in that file.
5. Remove the floppy disk from the floppy drive if the floppy disk is no longer
needed.
6. Push any bottom button or menu button to exit the menu.
Figure 4-4: Loading file; selecting storage drive
4-15
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
NOTE. The floppy disk file list displayed on the screen does not automatically
update when you replace the diskette with another one. To update the file list,
re-select the floppy disk drive.
Performance
Table 4–6 lists the sequence and waveform files on the Performance Check/Ad-
justment disk (063-2983-XX) that are used in these performance tests, the
AWG500–Series Waveform Generator front-panel settings that each file sets up,
and the performance test that uses each file.
Check/Adjustment Files
NOTE. The files on the Performance Check disk are locked (the files are marked
by the icon
in the file list), so the data in these files cannot be changed
unless the lock is opened.
Table 4-6: Waveforms and sequences in performance check disk
No. File name
EDIT menu
Form
SETUP menu
Marker setup
Usage
Points
Clock
Filter
Ampl Offset
1
MODE.WFM
1000
1 GHz
Through 1ĂV
0ĂV
Marker1,2:
0 to 499: High,
500 to 999: Low
Run mode,Trigger
level, Marker
2
PULSE.WFM
SINE.WFM
DOUT.PAT
AMP1.SEQ
AMP2.SEQ
1000
256
100 MHz Through 1ĂV
0ĂV
0ĂV
0ĂV
Pulse amplitude, InĆ
ternal trigger accuracy
3
1 GHz
Through 1ĂV
Sine characteristics
Digital data out
4
512
100 MHz Through 1ĂV
5
Amplitude accuracy
(Normal out)
6
Amplitude accuracy
(Direct out)
7
DC_P.WFM
(AMPx.SEQ)
1000
1000
1000
1000
100 MHz Through 1ĂV
100 MHz Through 1ĂV
100 MHz Through 1ĂV
0ĂV
0ĂV
0ĂV
Amplitude accuracy
Amplitude accuracy
Amplitude accuracy
Offset accuracy
1
1
8
DC_M.WFM
(AMPx.SEQ)
9
DC0.WFM
(AMP2.SEQ)
10
OFFSET.WFM
100 MHz Through 20 mV 0ĂV
4-16
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Table 4-6: Waveforms and sequences in performance check disk (Cont.)
No. File name
EDIT menu
Form
SETUP menu
Marker setup
Usage
Points
Clock
Filter
Ampl Offset
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
TRIG.WFM
100
1 MHz
Through 1ĂV
0ĂV
Trigger input
Event input
Event input
Event input
Event input
Event input
Event input
Event input
PT_EVENT.SEQ
PT_STROB.SEQ
S260.WFM
260
260
260
260
260
100 MHz Through 1ĂV
100 MHz Through 1ĂV
100 MHz Through 1ĂV
100 MHz Through 1 V
100 MHz Through 1ĂV
0ĂV
0ĂV
0ĂV
0 V
0ĂV
2
(PT_xxxxx.SEQ)
S260H.WFM
(PT_xxxxx.SEQ)
2
2
2
2
R260H.WFM
(PT_xxxxx.SEQ)
T260H.WFM
(PT_xxxxx.SEQ)
Q260H.WFM
(PT_xxxxx.SEQ)
1. The AMPx.SEQ represents AMP1.SEQ and AMP2.SEQ.
2. The PT_xxxxx.SEQ represents PT_EVENT.SEQ and PT_STROB.SEQ
4-17
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Tests
Test Record
Photocopy the following 4 pages and use them to record the performance test
results for your AWG510/520.
4-18
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Tests
AWG510 & AWG520 Test Record (Page 1 of 4)
Serial Number:
Certificate Number:
Technician:
Calibration Date:
Clock frequency tests
Low limit
Test result
High limit
10 MHz clock frequency accuracy
9,999,990 Hz
10,000,010 Hz
Amplitude and offset tests
Low limit
17.7 mV
195 mV
1.968 V
17.7 mV
195 mV
1.968 V
-10 mV
0.980 V
-1.020 V
-10 mV
0.980 V
-1.020 V
Test result
High limit
22.3 mV
205 mV
2.032 V
22.3 mV
205 mV
2.032 V
+10 mV
1.020 V
-0.980 V
+10 mV
1.020 V
-0.980 V
CH1
Amplitudeaccuracy
20 mV
200 mV
2V
CH2 or CH1
Amplitudeaccuracy
20 mV
200 mV
2V
CH1
Offset accuracy
0 V
1 V
-1 V
0 V
CH2 or CH1
Offset accuracy
1 V
-1 V
Direct DA Output tests
Low limit
0.45 V
Test result
High limit
0.55 V
CH1
Amplitudeaccuracy
Amplitudeaccuracy
Offset accuracy
Offset accuracy
Pulserisetime
CH2 or CH1
CH1
0.45 V
0.55 V
-0.297 V
-0.297 V
-0.243 V
-0.243 V
700 ps
CH2 or CH1
CH1
CH2 or CH1
Pulserisetime
700 ps
4-19
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Tests
AWG510 & AWG520 Test Record (Page 2 of 4)
Pulse response tests
Low limit
Test result
High limit
1.5 ns
+7 %
CH1
1 V amplitude
Risetime
Aberration
-7 %
-3 %
Flatness (after 50 ns)
Risetime
+3 %
CH1
2 V amplitude
2.5 ns
+10 %
+3 %
Aberration
-10 %
-3 %
Flatness (after 50 ns)
Risetime
CH2 or CH1
1 V amplitude
1.5 ns
+7 %
Aberration
-7%
Flatness (after 50 ns)
Risetime
-3 %
+3 %
CH2 or CH1
2 V amplitude
2.5 ns
+10 %
+3 %
Aberration
-10 %
-3 %
Flatness (after 50 ns)
Sine wave tests
CH1 Harmonics level
CH1 Noise level
Low limit
Test result
High limit
-50 dBc
-53 dBc
-50 dBc
-53 dBc
0 Hz - 400 MHz
0 Hz - 400 MHz
0 Hz - 400 MHz
0 Hz - 400 MHz
CH2 Harmonics level
CH2 Noise level
Trigger input tests
Low limit
4.65 V
Test result
High limit
5.35 V
Trigger level accuracy
5 V
-5 V
-5.35 V
-4.65 V
10MHz reference input tests
Low limit
Test result
High limit
50,010 kHz
50,510 kHz
Clock output frequency
10.0 MHz reference
10.1 MHz reference
49,990 kHz
50,490 kHz
4-20
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Tests
AWG510 & AWG520 Test Record (Page 3 of 4)
Add input tests
Low limit
Test result
High limit
Output level
Input 0 V
-10 mV
0.95 V
+10 mV
1.05 V
Input 1.0 V
Marker output tests
Low limit
-2.2 V
1.8 V
Test result
High limit
-1.8 V
2.2 V
CH 1
CH 1
CH 2
CH 2
Marker 1
Marker 2
Marker 1
Marker 2
Low level
High level
Low level
High level
Low level
High level
Low level
High level
-2.2 V
1.8 V
-1.8 V
2.2 V
-2.2 V
1.8 V
-1.8 V
2.2 V
-2.2 V
1.8 V
-1.8 V
2.2 V
Digitaldata output tests (Option 03 only)
Low limit
-2.2 V
1.8 V
Test result
High limit
-1.8 V
2.2 V
D0 output level
D1 output level
D2 output level
D3 output level
D4 output level
D5 output level
D6 output level
D7 output level
Low level
High level
Low level
High level
Low level
High level
Low level
High level
Low level
High level
Low level
High level
Low level
High level
Low level
High level
-2.2 V
1.8 V
-1.8 V
2.2 V
-2.2 V
1.8 V
-1.8 V
2.2 V
-2.2 V
1.8 V
-1.8 V
2.2 V
-2.2 V
1.8 V
-1.8 V
2.2 V
-2.2 V
1.8 V
-1.8 V
2.2 V
-2.2 V
1.8 V
-1.8 V
2.2 V
-2.2 V
1.8 V
-1.8 V
2.2 V
4-21
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Tests
AWG510 & AWG520 Test Record (Page 4 of 4)
Digital data output tests (Option 03 only)
Low limit
Test result
High limit
-1.8 V
2.2 V
D8 output level
Low level
High level
Low level
High level
-2.2 V
1.8 V
D9 output level
-2.2 V
1.8 V
-1.8 V
2.2 V
Maximum skew between D_ and D_
1 ns
Noise output tests
Low limit
Test result
High limit
Noise level at 100 MHz, -105 dBm/Hz
-107.5 dBm/Hz
-102.5 dBm/Hz
4-22
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Operating Mode Tests
These procedures check operation of the Cont, Triggered and Gated modes.
Check Cont Mode
Equipment
required
A 50ĂΩ coaxial cable and an oscilloscope.
Prerequisites
The AWG500-Series Waveform Generator must meet the prerequisites
listed on page 4-13.
1. Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator CH1 output connector through the coaxial cable to the
oscilloscope CH1 input connector (see Figure 4–5).
AWG500 Series Waveform Generator
Oscilloscope
50 W coaxial cable
Figure 4-5: Cont mode initial test hookup
b. Set the oscilloscope controls:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 V/div
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ns/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +100 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
4-23
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
2. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls and select the
waveform file:
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls: Push
UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
b. Select the waveform file: Load the MODE.WFM as referring to the
procedures on page 4–15.
3. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator CH1 output: Push the
RUN and CH1 OUT buttons so that the LEDs above the RUN button and
CH1 output connector light.
4. Check against limits: Check that the amplitude of the sine wave displayed on
the oscilloscope is 5 vertical divisions and that the waveform of one cycle
per 2 horizontal divisions is displayed.
5. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.
Check Triggered Mode
Equipment
required
Three 50ĂΩ coaxial cables, a BNC-T connector, a function generator,
and an oscilloscope.
Prerequisites
The AWG500-Series Waveform Generator meets the prerequisites
listed on page 4-13.
1. Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator CH1 output connector through the 50 W BNC coaxial cable to
the oscilloscope CH1 input connector.
b. Hook up the function generator: Connect the AWG500–Series Wave-
form Generator TRIG IN connector though a 50 W BNC coaxial cable
and BNC–T connector to the function generator output connector, and
connect a 50 W BNC coaxial cable to BNC–T connector and the
oscilloscope CH2 input (see Figure 4–6).
4-24
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
AWG500 Series Waveform
Generator rear panel
Oscilloscope
Function Generator (AFG310)
Connect the cable to the CH1
output connector on the front-panel
BNC T
Adapter
Connect the cable to the
TRIG IN connector through
the BNC T adapter.
Connect the cable to the TRIG IN
connector through the BNC T adapter.
Figure 4-6: Triggered mode initial test hookup
c. Set the oscilloscope controls:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1 a nd CH2
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 sca le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2V/div
CH2 sca le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2V/div
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
CH2 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 1 MW
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ns/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +100 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
d. Set the function generator (AFG310) controls:
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
Parameters
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 kHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 V (4 V into open circuit)
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 V (2 V into open circuit)
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off
4-25
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
2. Set AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls and select the waveform
file:
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
Push UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
b. Set triggered mode: Push SETUP (front–panel)! Run Mode (bot-
tom)! Triggered (side) to set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator
to triggered mode.
c. Select the file: Load the MODE.WFM as referring to the procedures on
page 4–15.
3. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator CH1 output: Push the
RUN and CH1 OUT buttons so that the LEDs above the RUN button and
CH1 output connector light.
4. Check triggered mode with manual triggering: Push the AWG500–Series
Waveform Generator FORCE TRIGGER button and check that when the
button is pushed, the oscilloscope displays a one-cycle sine wave.
5. Check triggered mode with external triggering:
a. Enable function generator output: Turn on the function generator output.
b. Check triggering: Check that for each trigger supplied by the function
generator, the oscilloscope displays a one-cycle sine wave (see Figure
4–7).
Waveform
output
CH1
Trigger
signal
CH2
Figure 4-7: Relationship between trigger signal and waveform output
4-26
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
6. End procedure: Turn off the function generator output. Retain the test
hookup.
Check Gated Mode
Equipment
required
Three 50ĂΩ coaxial cables, an adapter (BNC T male to 2 females), a
function generator, and an oscilloscope.
Prerequisites
The AWG500-Series Waveform Generator meets the prerequisites
listed on page 4-13.
1. Use the test hookup from previous check.
2. Set the test equipment controls:
a. Set the oscilloscope controls:
Vertic al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1 and CH2
CH1 and CH2 coupling . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 sc ale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5V/div
CH2 sc ale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2V/div
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
CH2 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 1 MW
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ms/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
b. Set the function generator (AFG310) controls:
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 kHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 V (4 V into open circuit)
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 V (2 V into open circuit)
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off
3. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls and select the
waveform file:
4-27
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
Push UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
b. Set gated mode: Push SETUP (front–panel)! Run Mode
(bottom)! Gated (side).
c. Select the waveform file: Load the MODE.WFM as referring to the
procedures on page 4–15.
4. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator CH1 output: Push the
RUN and CH1 OUT buttons so that the LEDs above the RUN button and
CH1 output connector light.
5. Check gated mode with manual trigger: Hold down the AWG500–Series
Waveform Generator FORCE TRIGGER button, and check that the
oscilloscope continuously displays a sine wave while you are holding down
the FORCE TRIGGER button.
6. Check gated mode with gate signal:
a. Change the oscilloscope horizontal sweep setting to 20 ms/div.
b. Set the oscilloscope trigger source to CH2.
c. Apply gate signal: Turn on the function generator output.
d. Check gated mode with positive gate signal: Check that the oscilloscope
displays a sine wave while the function generator gate signal amplitude
is equal to or larger than 1 V (see Figure 4–8).
Waveform
output
CH1
Gate
signal
CH2
Figure 4-8: Relationship between gate signal and waveform output
4-28
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
e. Change the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator trigger polarity to
negative: Push SETUP (front–panel)! Trigger (bottom)! Negative
(side).
f. Check gated mode with a negative gate signal: Check that the oscillo-
scope displays a sine wave while the function generator gate signal
amplitude is equal to or less than 1 V.
7. End procedure: Turn off the function generator output, and disconnect the
function generator and oscilloscope.
4-29
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Clock FrequencyTests
These procedures check the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator clock
frequency accuracy.
Equipment
required
A 50ĂΩ coaxial cable, a 50ĂΩ precision terminator and a frequency
counter.
Prerequisites
The AWG500-Series Waveform Generator must meet the prerequisites
listed on page 4-13.
1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up frequency counter: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator clock output connector through a 50 W BNC coaxial cable and
a 50 Ω precision terminator to the frequency counter input A connector
(see Figure 4–9).
AWG500 Series Waveform
Generator rear panel
Frequency Counter
50 W Terminator
50 W coaxial cable
Figure 4-9: Clock frequencyinitial test hookup
b. Set frequency counter controls:
INPUT A
Slope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A FREQ
Gatetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 s
Le ve l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
2. Set AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls and select the waveform:
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
Push UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
4-30
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
b. Select the file: Load the MODE.WFM as referring to the procedures on
page 4–15.
c. Set clock frequency:
H
H
Push HORIZONTAL MENU (front–panel)! Clock (side).
Enter numeric value of 10M: Push 1, 0 and M (SHIFT+7) keys in
this order.
3. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator output: Push the RUN
button so that the LEDs above the RUN button lights.
4. Check clock frequency accuracy: Check that the frequency counter reading is
10 MHz ±10 Hz (1 ppm).
5. End procedure: Disconnect the frequency counter.
4-31
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Amplitude and Offset Accuracy Tests (Normal Out)
These procedures check the accuracy of the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator normal waveform outputs; amplitude and offset.
NOTE. The amplitude and offset accuracy checks are structured as a continuous
test. After Check Amplitude Accuracy, the next test uses the control settings from
the last test and uses the next step in the sequence file.
Check Amplitude
Accuracy
Equipment
required
A 50ĂΩ coaxial cable, a 50ĂΩ precision terminator, a BNC (female)ĆtoĆ
dual banana adapter, and a digital multimeter (DMM).
Prerequisites
The instrument must meet the prerequisites listed on page 4-13.
1. Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up DMM: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator CH1
output through a 50 Ω BNC coaxial cable, a 50 Ω precision terminator,
and an adapter (BNC-to-dual banana) to the DMM input connector (see
Figure 4–10).
Dual Banana
Adapter
50 W
Terminator
AWG500 Series Waveform Generator
DMM
50 W coaxial cable
Figure 4-10: Amplitude accuracy initial test hookup
b. Set the DMM controls:
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VDC
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front
2. Set AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls and select the sequence
file:
4-32
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
Push UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
b. Set enhanced mode: Push SETUP (front–panel)! Run Mode (bot-
tom)! Enhanced (side) to set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator
to enhanced mode.
c. Select the sequence file: Load the AMP1.SEQ as referring to the
procedures on page 4–15.
3. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator CH1 output: Push the
RUN and CH1 OUT buttons so that the LEDs above the RUN button and
CH1 output connector light.
4. Check amplitude accuracy:
a. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator amplitude and confirm the
offset setting:
H
H
Push VERTICAL MENU (front–panel)! Amplitude (side).
Enter numeric value of 0.02: Push 0, ., 0, 2 and ENTER keys in this
order to set the amplitude to 0.020 V.
H
Confirm the current offset setting: Confirm that the offset setting
display on the Offset side button is 0.000 V. If not, push the Offset
side button, and push 0 and then ENTER key.
b. Check the amplitude accuracy of 20 mV amplitude setting:
H
H
H
H
Write the reading on DMM as a positive voltage.
Push the FORCE EVENT button.
Write the reading on DMM as a negative voltage.
Check that the positive minus negative voltages fall within
20 mV ± 2.3 mV.
c. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator amplitude: Push 0, ., 2 and
ENTER keys in this order to set the amplitude to 0.200 V.
d. Check the amplitude accuracy of 200 mV amplitude setting:
H
H
H
H
Push the FORCE EVENT button.
Write the reading on DMM as a positive voltage.
Push the FORCE EVENT button.
Write the reading on DMM as a negative voltage.
4-33
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
H
Check that the positive minus negative voltages fall within
200 mV ± 5 mV.
e. Enter numeric value of 2: Push 2 and ENTER keys in this order to set
the amplitude to 2 V.
f. Check the amplitude accuracy of 2 V amplitude setting:
H
H
H
H
H
Push the FORCE EVENT button.
Write the reading on DMM as a positive voltage.
Push the FORCE EVENT button.
Write the reading on DMM as a negative voltage.
Check that the positive minus negative voltages fall within
2 V ± 0.032 V.
5. Check CH1 or CH2: Repeat the Check Amplitude Accuracy for the AWG510
CH1 or the AWG520 CH2, depending on the instrument that you are
currently testing.
6. End procedure: Retain the test hookup and control settings.
Check Offset Accuracy
1. Use the test hookup and settings from previous check.
2. Set AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls and select the sequence
file:
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls: Push
UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
b. Select the sequence file: Load the OFFSET.WFM as referring to the
procedures on page 4–15.
c. Push VERTICAL MENU (front–panel)! Amplitude (side).
d. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator amplitude: Push 0, ., 0, 2
and ENTER keys in this order to set the amplitude to 0.020 V.
3. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator CH1 output: Push the
RUN and CH1 buttons so that the LEDs above the RUN button and CH1
output connector light.
4-34
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
4. Check offset accuracy:
a. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator offset:
H
H
Push the Offset side button.
Enter numeric value of 0: Push 0 and ENTER keys in this order.
b. Check the offset accuracy of 0 V offset setting: Check that the reading on
the DMM falls within 0 V ± 10 mV.
c. Change the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator offset to 1 V: Push 1
and ENTER keys in this order.
d. Check the offset accuracy of 1 V offset setting: Check that the reading on
the DMM falls within 1 V ± 0.020 V.
e. Change the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator offset to –1 V: Push –,
1 and ENTER keys in this order.
f. Check the offset accuracy of –1 V offset setting: Check that the reading
on the DMM falls within –1 V ± 0.020 V.
5. Check CH1 or CH2: Repeat the Check Offset Accuracy for the AWG510
CH1 or the AWG510 CH2, depending on the instrument that you are
currently testing.
6. End procedure: Disconnect the DMM and 50 Ω terminator.
4-35
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Amplitude, Offset Accuracy and Rise Time Tests (Direct DA Out)
These procedures check the accuracy of the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator direct waveform outputs; amplitude and offset.
Check Amplitude
Equipment
required
A 50ĂΩ coaxial cable, a 50ĂΩ precision terminator, a BNC (female)ĆtoĆ
dual banana adapter, and a digital multimeter (DMM).
and
DC Offset
Prerequisites
The AWG500-Series Waveform Generator meets the prerequisites
listed on page 4-13.
1. Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up DMM: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator CH1
output through a 50 Ω BNC coaxial cable, a 50 Ω precision terminator,
and an adapter (BNC-to-dual banana) to the DMM input connector (see
Figure 4–11).
Dual Banana
Adapter
AWG500 Series Waveform Generator
50 W
Terminator
DMM
50 W coaxial cable
Figure 4-11: Direct DA out amplitude accuracy initial test hookup
b. Set the DMM controls:
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VDC
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front
2. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls and select the
waveform file:
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
Push UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
4-36
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
b. Set enhanced mode: Push SETUP (front–panel)! Run Mode
(bottom)! Enhanced (side) to set the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator to enhanced mode.
c. Set direct DA mode: Push VERTICAL MENU (front–panel)!
Add/Direct Out (side)! Output (side)! Direct (side).
d. Select the file: Load the AMP2.SEQ as referring to the procedures on
page 4–15.
3. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator CH1 output: Push the
RUN and CH1 OUT buttons so that the LEDs above the RUN button and
CH1 output connector light.
4. Check direct DA amplitude accuracy:
a. Check the value at the high state:
H
H
Check that the reading from the DMM display is about 0 V.
Write the reading value.
b. Check the value at the low state:
H
H
Push the FORCE EVENT button.
Check that the reading from the DMM display is about
–0.5 V.
H
Write the reading value.
c. Check the amplitude: Check that the high state value minus low state
value falls within 0.5 V "0.05 V.
d. Check the DC offset:
H
H
Push the FORCE EVENT button.
Check that the reading from the DMM display is about
–0.27 V "0.027 V.
5. Check CH1 or CH2: Repeat the step 4 for the AWG510 CH1 or the
AWG510 CH2, depending on the instrument that you are currently testing.
6. End procedure: Disconnect the DMM.
4-37
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Check Pulse Rise Time
Equipment
required
A 50ĂΩ coaxial cable, SMAĆtoĆBNC adapter and an oscilloscope
(TDS820).
Prerequisites
The instrument must meet the prerequisites listed on page 4-13.
1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator CH1 output connector and the oscilloscope CH1 input
connector through the 50 W BNC coaxial cable and the SMA-to-BNC
adapter (see Figure 4–12).
Oscilloscope (TDS820)
AWG500 Series Waveform Generator
SMAĆtoĆBNC
adapter
50 W coaxial cable
Figure 4-12: Direct DA out pulse rise time initial test hookup
b. Set oscilloscope controls:
Vertic al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 sc ale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100mV/div
CH1 vertical position . . . . . . . . . . . About 2.7 Div
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ps/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -250 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
4-38
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
NOTE. The pulse rise time tests use the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator
control setting that have been used in the amplitude and DC offset tests. Do not
initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls.
2. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls and select the
waveform file:
a. Select the file: Load the PULSE.WFM as referring to the procedures on
page 4–15.
b. Set enhanced mode: Push SETUP (front–panel)! Run Mode (bot-
tom)! Continuous (side) to set the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator to continuous mode.
c. Set direct DA mode: Push Vertical (bottom)!
Add/Direct Out (side)! Output (side)! Direct (side).
3. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator CH1 output: Push the
RUN and CH1 OUT buttons so that the LEDs above the RUN button and
CH1 output connector light.
4. Check pulse rise time: Check that the rise time of the pulse waveform
displayed on the oscilloscope is equal to or less than 700 ps.
5. Check CH1 or CH2: Repeat the step 4 for the AWG510 CH1 or the
AWG510 CH2, depending on the instrument that you are currently testing.
6. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.
4-39
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Pulse Response Tests
This procedure checks the pulse response characteristics of the AWG500–Series
Waveform Generator output waveforms at amplitudes of 1 V and 2 V.
Equipment
required
A 50ĂΩ coaxial cable and an oscilloscope.
Prerequisites
The instrument must meet the prerequisites listed on page 4-13.
1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator CH1 output connector through the 50 W BNC coaxial cable to
the oscilloscope CH1 input connector (see Figure 4–13).
AWG500 Series Waveform Generator
Oscilloscope
50 W coaxial cable
Figure 4-13: Pulse response initial test hookup
b. Set oscilloscope controls:
Verti cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 V/div
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ps/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
4-40
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
2. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls and select the
waveform file:
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
Push UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
b. Select the file: Load the PULSE.WFM as referring to the procedures on
page 4–15.
3. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator CH1 output: Push the
RUN and CH1 OUT buttons so that the LEDs above the RUN button and
CH1 output connector light.
4. Check pulse response at 1 V amplitude:
a. Check rise time: Check that the rise time of the waveform displayed on
the oscilloscope from 10% to 90% point is equal to or less than 1.5 ns.
b. Check aberration:
H
H
Set oscilloscope sweep to 12.5 ns/div (or 20 ns/div).
Check that the aberration of the displayed waveform on the
oscilloscope screen is within ± 7 %.
c. Check flatness:
H
H
Set oscilloscope sweep to 200 ns/div.
Check that the flatness of the displayed waveform on the oscillo-
scope is within ± 3 % after 50 ns from the rising edge.
5. Check pulse response at 2 V amplitude:
a. Change the oscilloscope controls:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 V/div
b. Change the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
H
H
Push VERTICAL MENU! Amplitude.
Enter numeric value of 2: Push 2 and ENTER keys in this order.
4-41
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
c. Repeat substeps 4a through 4c, as checking to the follow limits:
H
H
H
Rise time
Aberration
Flatness
2.5 ns, maximum
± 10 %, maximum
± 3 %, maximum
6. Check CH1 or CH2: Repeat the Check Pulse Response for the AWG510
CH1 or the AWG510 CH2, depending on the instrument that you are
currently testing.
7. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.
4-42
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Sine Wave Tests
This procedure checks the sine wave characteristics of the AWG500–Series
Waveform Generator output waveforms.
Equipment
required
A 50ĂΩ coaxial cable, a DC block, an adapter (N male to BNC female),
and a spectrum analyzer.
Prerequisites
The instrument must meet the prerequisites listed on page 4-13.
1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up the spectrum analyzer: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator CH1 output connector through the coaxial cable, adapter, and
DC Block to the input connector on the spectrum analyzer (see Figure
4–14).
AWG500 Series Waveform Generator
Spectrum Analyzer
Adapter
and DC
Block
50 W coaxial cable
Figure 4-14: Sine wave initial test hookup
b. Set spectrum analyzer controls:
Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 MHz
Full Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 MHz
Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dBm
RF attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 dB
Video filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 kHz
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MHz
4-43
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
2. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls and select the
waveform file:
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls: Push
UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
b. Select the file: Load the SINE.WFM as referring to the procedures on
page 4–15.
3. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator CH1 output: Push the
RUN and CH1 OUT buttons so that the LEDs above the RUN button and
CH1 output connector light.
4. Check harmonics and noise level:
a. Check harmonics level: Check that the harmonics level of the spectrum
displayed on the spectrum analyzer from 0 Hz to 400 MHz is –50 dBc or
less.
b. Check noise level: Check that the noise level of the spectrum displayed
on the spectrum analyzer from 0 Hz to 400 MHz is –53 dBc or less.
5. Check CH2: Repeat the Sine Wave Tests for the AWG520 CH2, depending
on the instrument that you are currently testing.
6. End procedure: Disconnect the spectrum analyzer.
4-44
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Internal Trigger Tests
These procedures check internal trigger function of the AWG500–Series
Waveform Generator.
Equipment
required
A 50ĂΩ coaxial cable and an oscilloscope.
Prerequisites
The instrument must meet the prerequisites listed on page 4-13.
1. Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator CH1 output connector through the coaxial cable to the
oscilloscope CH1 input connector on the oscilloscope (see Figure 4–15).
AWG500 Series Waveform Generator
Oscilloscope
50 W coaxial cable
Figure 4-15: Internal trigger initial test hookup
b. Set the oscilloscope controls:
Verti cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 V/div
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ms/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 V
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
4-45
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
2. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls and select the
waveform file:
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
Push UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
b. Select the file: Load the MODE.WFM as referring to the procedures on
page 4–15.
c. Set trigger mode: Push SETUP (front–panel)! Run Mode (bot-
tom)! Triggered (side).
d. Set trigger interval:
H
Push SETUP (front–panel)! Trigger (bottom)! Source (side)!
Internal (side).
H
H
Push the Interval side button.
Enter numeric value of 1 m: Push 1 and m (SHIFT+9) keys in this
order.
3. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator CH1 output: Push the
RUN and CH1 OUT buttons so that the LEDs above the RUN button and
CH1 output connector light.
4. Check the trigger interval: Check that the period of the waveform displayed
on the oscilloscope is one horizontal divisions.
5. Change the trigger interval:
a. Enter numeric value of 2 ms: Push 2 and m (SHIFT+9) keys in this
order.
6. Check the trigger interval: Check that the period of the waveform displayed
on the oscilloscope is two horizontal divisions.
7. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.
4-46
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Trigger Input Tests
These procedures verify the trigger level accuracy of the AWG500-Series
Arbitrary Waveform Generator.
Equipment
required
A BNC T adapter,Ăthree 50ĂW BNCĂcoaxial cable, Ăa function generator,
and an oscilloscope.
Prerequisites
The AWG500-Series Waveform Generator Arbitrary Waveform
Generator must meet the prerequisites listed on page 4-13.
1. Do the following steps to install the test hookup and set the test equipment
controls:
a. Use a 50 W BNC coaxial cable to connect the AWG500–Series
Waveform Generator CH1 output connector to the oscilloscope CH1
input connector.
b. Connect a BNC T adapter to the TRIG IN connector and then use a 50
W BNC coaxial cable to connect the BNC T adapter to the oscilloscope
CH2 input connector.
c. Use a 50 W BNC coaxial cable to connect the function generator output
to the other end of the BNC T adapter.
AWG500-Series Arbitrary Waveform
Oscilloscope(TDS784C)
Generator rear panel
Function Generator (AFG310)
CH1 in
Connect the CH1 OUTPUT of AWG500
series to the CH1 input of the oscilloscope.
CH2 in
BNC T
adapter
Connect the cable to the TRIG IN
connector on the rear panel
Connect the TRIG IN connector to the CH2
input of the oscilloscope.
Figure 4-16: Trigger input initial test hookup
4-47
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
d. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Push the Default Setup (front).
Verti cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1 and CH2
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 mV/div
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
CH2 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V/div
CH2 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 1 MW
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ms/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +100 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
e. Set the function generator as follows:
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
Parameter
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Hz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 V (2 V i nopen circuit)
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Adjust such as a pulse 4.65 V in
amplitude referenced to ground)
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off
2. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator and load the waveform file.
a. Push UTILITY (front-panel)! System (bottom)! Factory Reset
(side)! OK (side).
b. Push SETUP (front-panel)! Run Mode (bottom)! Triggered (side).
c. Load the TRIG.WFM file.
Refer to Loading Files on page 4–15 for file loading procedures.
3. Push the RUN and CH1 OUT buttons.
The LEDs above the RUN button and CH1 output connector are on.
4-48
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
H
Verify that the CH1 OUTPUT is off.
If the CH1 LED is on, push CH1 OUTPUT (front-panel) to turn the
LED off.
4. Set the trigger level to 5 V by following the substeps below:
a. Set the trigger level.
H
H
Push SETUP (front-panel)! Trigger (bottom)! Level (side).
Push 5 and ENTER keys in this order.
b. Set the offset level of generator.
H
H
Push generator output ON.
Push Cursor, % , & ,
,
keys as the high level of a pulse to be set
to 4.65V.
c. Verify that no waveform is displayed on the oscilloscope.
Trigger Signal CH2
(4.65 V level)
NOTE: In step 4b this
voltage level equals
4.65 V. In step 4d this
voltage level equals
5.35 V.
Figure 4-17: Trigger Signal (+5V check1)
d. Push Cursor, % , & ,
,
keys as the high level of a pulse to be set to
5.35V.
e. Verify that a sine wave is displayed on the oscilloscope.
4-49
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Trigger Signal CH2
(5.35 V level)
CH1
Figure 4-18: Trigger Signal (+5V check2)
5. Verify the Trigger level accuracy at –5V by following the substeps below:
a. Set the trigger level of AWG500.
H
H
Push Level (side).
Push –, 5 and ENTER keys in this order.
b. Set the offset level of generator.
H
Push Cursor, % , & ,
to –4.65V.
,
keys as the low level of a pulse to be set
c. Verify that no waveform is displayed on the oscilloscope.
4-50
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
NOTE: In step 5b this
voltage level equals
-4.65 V.
Trigger Signal CH2
(-4.65 V level)
Figure 4-19: Trigger Signal (-5V check1)
d. Push Cursor, % , & ,
,
keys as the low level of a pulse to be set to
–5.35V.
e. Verify that a sine wave is displayed on the oscilloscope.
CH1
Trigger Signal CH2
(-5.35 V level)
Figure 4-20: Trigger Signal (-5V check2)
6. Push the RUN button to turn off the RUN LED.
7. Disconnect all the cable.
4-51
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Event Input and Enhanced Mode Tests
These procedures check the event input signals and enhanced mode operation.
NOTE. The event input check with strobe off and strobe input check are struc-
tured as a continuous test. After Check Event Input with Strobe Off, the next test
uses the connections and oscilloscope settings from the last test.
Check Event Input with
Strobe Off
Equipment
required
A 50ĂΩ coaxial cable, an oscilloscope, and customĆmade ground
closure.
Prerequisites
The AWG500-Series Waveform Generator must meet the prerequisites
listed on page 4-13.
1. Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator CH1 output connector through the coaxial cable to the
oscilloscope CH1 input connector (see Figure 4–21).
AWG500 Series WaveformGenerator
Oscilloscope
50 W coaxial cable
Figure 4-21: Event input and enhanced mode initial test hookup
b. Connect the ground closure: Connect the ground closure to the EVENT
IN connector on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator rear panel.
c. Set the oscilloscope controls:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 V/div
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 ms/div
4-52
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +100 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
2. Set all the switches of the ground closure to open.
3. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls and select the
sequence file:
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
Push UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
b. Select the sequence file: Load the PT_EVENT.SEQ as referring to the
procedures on page 4–15.
c. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator to enhanced mode: Push
SETUP (front–panel)! Run Mode (bottom)! Enhanced (side) to set
the enhanced mode.
4. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator CH1 output: Push the
RUN and CH1 OUT buttons so that the LEDs above the RUN button and
CH1 output connector light.
5. Check the EVENT IN connector pin 0 input:
a. Confirm the waveform on the oscilloscope: Confirm that the waveform
being displayed on the oscilloscope is as shown in Figure 4–22.
Figure 4-22: Waveform while all ground disclosure switches are open
4-53
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
b. Generate an event signal: Close the SW1 of the ground closure to
generate an event signal on the EVENT IN connector pin 0.
c. Confirm the waveform on the oscilloscope: Confirm that the oscilloscope
displays the waveform as shown in Figure 4–23 and that the waveform
amplitude is almost as half as that in Figure 4–22.
Figure 4-23: Waveform output when the SW1 is closed
d. Degenerate the event signal: Open the SW1 of the ground closure to
degenerate the event signal.
e. Confirm the waveform on the oscilloscope: Confirm that the oscilloscope
displays back the waveform in Figure 4–22.
6. Check the EVENT IN connector pin 1 input:
a. Generate an event signal: Close the SW2 of the ground closure to
generate an event signal on the EVENT IN connector pin 1.
b. Confirm the waveform on the oscilloscope: Confirm that the oscilloscope
displays the waveform as shown in Figure 4–24.
4-54
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Figure 4-24: Waveform output when the SW2 is closed
c. Degenerate the event signal: Open the SW2 of the ground closure to
degenerate the event signal.
d. Confirm the waveform on the oscilloscope: Confirm that the oscilloscope
displays back the waveform in Figure 4–22.
7. Check the EVENT IN connector pin 2 input:
a. Generate an event signal: Close the SW3 of the ground closure to
generate an event signal on the EVENT IN connector pin 2.
b. Confirm the waveform on the oscilloscope: Confirm that the oscilloscope
displays the waveform as shown in Figure 4–25.
Figure 4-25: Waveform output when the SW3 is closed
4-55
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
c. Degenerate the event signal: Open the SW3 of the ground closure to
degenerate the event signal.
d. Confirm the waveform on the oscilloscope: Confirm that the oscilloscope
displays back the waveform in Figure 4–22.
8. Check the EVENT IN connector pin 3 input:
a. Generate an event signal: Close the SW4 of the ground closure to
generate an event signal on the EVENT IN connector pin 3.
b. Confirm the waveform on the oscilloscope: Confirm that the oscilloscope
displays the waveform as shown in Figure 4–26.
Figure 4-26: Waveform output when the SW4 is closed
c. Degenerate the event signal: Open the SW4 of the ground closure to
degenerate the event signal.
d. Confirm the waveform on the oscilloscope: Confirm that the oscilloscope
displays back the waveform in Figure 4–22.
9. End procedure: Retain the test hookup and control settings.
4-56
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Check Strobe Input
1. Use the test hookup and oscilloscope settings from previous check.
2. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls and select the
sequence file:
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
Push UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
b. Select the waveform file: Load the PT_STROB.SEQ as referring to the
procedures on page 4–15.
c. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator to enhanced mode: Push
SETUP (front–panel)! Run Mode (bottom)! Enhanced (side) to set
the run mode to enhanced.
3. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator CH1 output: Push the
RUN and CH1 OUT buttons so that the LEDs above the RUN button and
CH1 output connector light.
4. Check the EVENT IN connector strobe pin input:
a. Confirm the waveform on the oscilloscope: Confirm that the waveform
being displayed on the oscilloscope is as shown in Figure 4–27.
Figure 4-27: Initial waveform output
b. Generate a strobe signal: Close the SW5 of the ground closure to
generate an event signal on the EVENT IN connector strobe pin.
c. Confirm the waveform on the oscilloscope: Confirm that the oscilloscope
displays the dc waveform as shown in Figure 4–28.
4-57
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Figure 4-28: DC waveform output when the SW5 is closed
d. Degenerate the strobe signal: Open the SW5 of the ground closure to
degenerate the strobe signal on the EVENT IN connector strobe pin.
e. Confirm the waveform on the oscilloscope: Confirm that the dc
waveform is kept displaying on the oscilloscope.
f. Generate a strobe signal: Close the SW5 of the ground closure again.
g. Confirm the waveform on the oscilloscope: Confirm that the oscilloscope
displays back the waveform in Figure 4–27.
5. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope and ground closure.
4-58
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
10 MHz Reference Input Tests
These procedures check the 10 MHz reference input function of the
AWG500–Series Waveform Generator.
Equipment
required
Two 50ĂΩ coaxial cables, a frequency counter, and a function
generator.
Prerequisites
The AWG500-Series Waveform Generator meets the prerequisites
listed on page 4-13.
1. Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up the frequency counter: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator CLOCK OUT connector through the coaxial cable to the
input A connector on the frequency counter.
b. Hook up the function generator:
H
Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator 10 MHz REF IN
connector though a coaxial cable to the function generator output
connector (see Figure 4–29).
AWG500 Series Waveform
Generator rear panel
Function Generator (AFG310)
Frequency Counter
50 W coaxial cable
50 W coaxial cable
Figure 4-29: 10 MHz reference initial test hookup
c. Set the frequency counter controls:
INPUT A
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A FREQ
Gate time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 s
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
4-59
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
d. Set the function generator (AFG310) controls:
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 MHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 V (4 V int oopen circuit)
Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
Out put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On
2. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls and select the
waveform file:
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
Push UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
b. Select the file: Load the MODE.WFM as referring to the procedures on
page 4–15.
c. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator clock reference to external:
H
Push HORIZONTAL MENU (front–panel)! Clock Ref (side) so
that the clock reference is set to External.
H
H
Push the Clock side button.
Enter numeric value of 50M: Push 5, 0, M (SHIFT+7) keys in this
order.
3. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator output: Push the RUN
button so that the LED above the RUN button lights.
4. Check the clock output frequency with 10.0 MHz reference: Check that the
frequency counter reading is 50.0 MHz "10 kHz.
5. Modify the function generator controls:
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 MHz
6. Check the clock output frequency with 10.1 MHz reference: Check that the
frequency counter reading is 50.5 MHz "10 kHz.
7. End procedure: Turn the function generator output off and disconnect the
function generator and frequency counter.
4-60
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
External Clock Input Tests
These procedures check the External clock input function of the AWG500–Series
Waveform Generator.
Equipment
required
Two 50ĂΩ coaxial cables, an adapter (N male to BNC femal), a signal
generator, and an oscilloscope.
Prerequisites
The AWG500-Series Waveform Generator meets the prerequisites
listed on page 4-13.
1. Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator CH1 output connector through the coaxial cable to the
oscilloscope CH1 input connector (see Figure 4–30).
b. Hook up the function generator:
H
Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator EXT CLOCK
IN connector through a coaxial cable to the signal generator output
connector with a N–BNC adapter(see Figure 4–30).
AWG500 Series Waveform
Generator rear panel
Signal Generator
Oscilloscope
Connect the cable to the CH1
output connector on the front panel
N-BNCĂĂ
Adapter
Connect the cable to the EXT CLOCK IN connector through the
N-BNC adapter.
Figure 4-30: External clock input initial test hookup
c. Set the oscilloscope controls:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 V/div
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
4-61
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ns/div
Trigger
So urce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slo pe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +100 mV
Mo de . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
d. Set the signal generator controls:
Mo de . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 GHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.25 V
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On
p-p
2. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls and select the
waveform file:
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
Push UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
b. Select the file: Load the MODE.WFM as referring to the procedures on
page 4–15.
c. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator clock source to external:
Push HORIZONTAL MENU (front–panel)! Clock Src (side) so that
the clock reference is set to External.
3. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator CH1 output: Push the
RUN and CH1 OUT buttons so that the LEDs above the RUN button and
CH1 output connector light.
4. Check against limits: Check that the amplitude of the sine wave displayed on
the oscilloscope is 5 vertical divisions and that the waveform of one cycle
per 2 horizontal divisions is displayed.
5. End procedure: Turn the signal generator output off and disconnect the
signal generator .
4-62
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Add Input Tests
This procedure checks the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator Add Input
function.
Equipment
required
A 50 W terminator, a dualĆbanana adapter, Two 50ĂΩ coaxial cables, a
function generator, and a DMM.
Prerequisites
The AWG500-Series Waveform Generator meets the prerequisites
listed on page 4-13.
1. Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up the function generator: Connect the AWG500–Series Wave-
form Generator ADD IN connector though a 50 W BNC coaxial cable to
the function generator output connector.
b. Hook up DMM: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator CH1
output through a 50 Ω BNC coaxial cable, a 50 Ω precision terminator,
and an adapter (BNC-to-dual banana) to the DMM input connector (see
Figure 4–31).
Dual Banana 50 W
adapter Terminator
AWG500 Series Waveform Generator
Function Generator
DMM
50 W coaxial cable
Connect the cable to the ADD IN
connector on the rear panel.
Figure 4-31: Add operation initial test hookup
c. Set the DMM controls:
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VDC
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front
4-63
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
d. Set the function generator (AFG310) controls:
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
Parameters
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 kHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 V
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off
2. Set AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
Push UTILITY (front–panel)! System (bottom)!
Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
b. Set the amplitude settings:
H
H
Push VERTICAL MENU (front–panel)! Amplitude (side).
Push 0, ., 0, 2 and ENTER keys in order (0.02).
c. Connect the ADD IN connector to CH1 output:
H
Push ADD/Direct Out... (side) ! External (side).
d. Select the waveform file: Load the DC0.WFM as referring to the
procedures on page 4–15.
3. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator CH1 output: Push the
RUN and CH1 OUT buttons so that the LEDs above the RUN button and
CH1 output connector light.
4. Check the output level corresponds to the input level:
a. Check the level when the function generator output is off:
H
Check the reading on DMM: Check that the value is within the range
from –10 mV to +10 mV, and note this reading value.
b. Enable function generator output: Turn on the function generator output.
c. Check the level when the function generator output is on:
H
Check the reading on DMM: Check that the reading of the DMM
minus the value read in step 4.a is within the range between 0.95 V
and 1.05 V.
5. End procedure: Turn off the function generator output, and disconnect the
function generator and DMM.
4-64
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Marker Output Tests
These procedures check the accuracy of the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator marker output level.
Equipment
required
A 50ĂΩ SMBĆtoĆBNC coaxial cable andan oscilloscope.
The instrument must meet the prerequisites listedon page 4-13.
Prerequisites
1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator MARKER OUT:CH1 M1 connector through a SMB-to-BNC
coaxial cable to the oscilloscope CH1 input connector (see Figure 4–32).
AWG500 Series Waveform
Generator rear panel
Oscilloscope
50 W SMBĆtoĆBNC coaxial cable
Connect the SMB
connector endto MARKER
OUT:CH1 M1 connector
Figure 4-32: Marker output initial test hookup
b. Set oscilloscope controls:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 V/d iv
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
CH1 offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ms/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC
4-65
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
2. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls and select the
waveform file:
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
Push UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
b. Select the waveform for the CH1: Load the MODE.WFM as referring to
the procedures on page 4–15.
c. Select the waveform for the CH2 (for the AWG520 only):
H
H
Push the CH2 button.
Select the waveform: Load the MODE.WFM as referring to the
procedures on page 4–15.
d. Set the clock frequency:
H
H
Push HORIZONTAL MENU (front–panel)! Clock (side).
Enter numeric value of 100M: Push 1, 0, 0 and M (SHIFT+7) keys
in this order.
e. Set the marker controls for the CH1:
H
H
Push the CH1 button.
Push VERTICAL MENU (front–panel)! Marker... (side)!
Marker1 Low Level (side).
H
H
H
Enter numeric value of –2: Push –, 2 and ENTER keys in this order.
Push the Marker2 Low Level side button.
Enter numeric value of –2: Push –, 2 and ENTER keys in this order.
f. Set the marker controls for the CH2: Push CH2 button instead of CH1
to do the procedures in step 2.e.
3. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator output: Push the RUN ,
CH1 OUT and CH2 OUT button so that the RUN LED, CH1 OUT LED
and CH2 OUT LED light.
4-66
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
NOTE. At the marker level measurements from an oscilloscope, do not measure
the high and low level voltages that contain the ringing by overshoot or
undershoot. Always perform the measurements after the level has been stabled.
4. Check CH1 marker output level accuracy:
a. Check Marker 1 output level:
H
H
Check that the reading for the low level on the oscilloscope screen is
within the range between –2.2 V and –1.8 V.
Check Marker 1 output high level: Check that the reading for the
high level on the oscilloscope screen is in the range between
1.8 V and 2.2 V.
b. Change the hook up: Disconnect the SMB-to-BNC cable from the
AWG500–Series Waveform Generator MARKER OUT:CH1 M1
connector and connect it to the MARKER OUT:CH1 M2 connector
c. Check Marker 2 output level:
H
H
Check that the reading for the low level on the oscilloscope screen is
within the range between –2.2 V and –1.8 V.
Check Marker 1 output high level: Check that the reading for the
high level on the oscilloscope screen is within the range between
1.8 V and 2.2 V.
5. Check CH2 marker output level accuracy (for the AWG520 only):
a. Change the hook up: Disconnect the SMB-to-BNC cable from the
AWG500–Series Waveform Generator MARKER OUT:CH1 M2
connector and connect it to the MARKER OUT:CH2 M1 connector
b. Check Marker 1 output level:
H
Check Marker 1 output low level: Check that the reading for the low
level on the oscilloscope screen is within the range between –2.2 V
and –1.8 V.
H
Check Marker 1 output high level: Check that the reading for the
high level on the oscilloscope screen is within the range between
1.8 V and 2.2 V.
c. Change the hook up: Disconnect the SMB-to-BNC cable from the
AWG500–Series Waveform Generator MARKER OUT:CH2 M1
connector and connect it to the MARKER OUT:CH2 M2 connector
d. Check Marker 2 output level:
4-67
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
H
H
Check Marker 1 output low level: Check that the reading for the low
level on the oscilloscope screen is within the range between –2.2 V
and –1.8 V.
Check Marker 1 output high level: Check that the reading for the
high level on the oscilloscope screen is within the range between
1.8 V and 2.2 V.
6. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.
4-68
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Marker Delay Tests
These procedures check the marker delay function of the AWG500–Series
Waveform Generator.
Equipment
required
Two 50ĂΩ SMBĆtoĆBNC coaxial cables andan oscilloscope.
Prerequisites
The instrument must meet the prerequisites listedon page 4-13.
1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator MARKER OUT CH1:M1 and M2 outputs through 50 Ω
SMB-to-BNC coaxial cables to the oscilloscope CH1 and CH2 input
connectors, respectively (see Figure 4–33).
AWG500 Series Waveform
Generator rear panel
Oscilloscope
CH1
CH2
50 W SMBĆtoĆBNC coaxial cable
50 W SMBĆtoĆBNC coaxial cable
Connect the SMB connectors
endto MARKER OUT CH1:M1
andM2 connectors
Figure 4-33: Digital data output initial test hookup
b. Set the oscilloscope controls:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1 and CH2
CH1 andCH2 coupling . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 andCH2 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 V/d iv
CH1 andCH2 offset . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
CH1 andCH2 input impedance . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ps/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH2
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
4-69
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 V
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal
2. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls and select the
waveform file:
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
Push UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
b. Select the waveform for the CH1: Load the MODE.WFM as referring to
the procedures on page 4–15.
3. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator output: Push the RUN
button so that the RUN LED lights.
4. Check the CH1 Marker 1 delay function works:
a. Push HORIZONTAL MENU (front–panel)! Marker 1 Delay (side)
b. Continuously change the Marker 1 delay from 0 s to 2.0 ns by turning
the general purpose knob.
c. Confirm that the Marker 1 output delay relative to the Marker 2 output
varies from 0 s to 2.0 ns on the oscilloscope screen.
5. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator and oscilloscope controls:
a. Enter numeric value of 0 s: Push 0 and ENTER keys to set the Marker 1
Delay back to 0 s.
b. Change the oscilloscope controls: Change the oscilloscope trigger source
from CH2 to CH1.
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
6. Check the CH1 Marker 2 delay function works:
a. Push the Marker 2 Delay side button.
b. Continuously change the Marker 2 delay from 0 s to 2.0 ns by turning
the general purpose knob.
c. Confirm that the Marker 2 output delay relative to the Marker 1 output
varies from 0 s to about 2.0 ns on the oscilloscope screen.
4-70
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
7. Check the CH2 Marker delay if your instrument model is the AWG520:
a. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator and oscilloscope controls:
H
H
Enter numeric value of 0 s: Push 0 and ENTER keys to set the
Marker 2 Delay back to 0 s.
Change the oscilloscope controls: Change the oscilloscope trigger
source from CH1 to CH2.
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH2
b. Change the cable connection on the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator:
H
H
Disconnect the cable from the MARKER OUT CH1: M1, and
connect the cable to the MARKER OUT CH2: M1.
Disconnect the cable from the MARKER OUT CH1: M2, and
connect the cable to the MARKER OUT CH2: M2.
c. Repeat the Marker Delay Tests for the CH2, in step 2.b.
8. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.
4-71
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Digital Data Output Tests (Option 03 Only)
These procedures check the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator digital data
output level accuracy and skew.
Check Output Levels
Equipment
required
A 50ĂΩ SMBĆtoĆBNC coaxial cable, and an oscilloscope.
The instrument must meet the prerequisites listed on page 4-13.
Prerequisites
1. Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator DIGITAL DATA OUT:D0 output through a 50 Ω SMB-to-
BNC coaxial cable to the oscilloscope input connector (see Figure 4–34).
AWG500 Series Waveform
Generator rear panel
Oscilloscope
50 W SMBĆtoĆBNC coaxial cable
Connect the SMB
connector end to DIGITAL
DATA OUT:D0 connector
Figure 4-34: Digital data output level initial test hookup
b. Set the oscilloscope controls:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 V/div
CH1 offse t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Swe e p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1ms/div
Trigger
Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC
4-72
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
2. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
Push UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
b. Select waveform file for DIGITAL:
H
H
Push the DIGITAL button.
Select the waveform for the DIGITAL: Load the DOUT.PAT as
referring to the procedures on page 4–15.
c. Set the digital data output low level:
H
Set the low level: Push VERTICAL MENU (front–panel)!
Low Level (side).
H
Enter numeric value of –2: Push –, 2 and ENTER keys in this order.
d. Turn on the digital data out: Push the Output side button so that the
Output is set to On.
3. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator output: Push the RUN
button so that the LEDs above the RUN button lights.
NOTE. At the output level measurements from an oscilloscope, do not measure
the high and low level voltages that contain the ringing by overshoot or
undershoot. Always perform the measurements after the level has been stabled.
4. Check the digital data output level accuracy:
a. Check the D0 output level:
H
H
Check the low level: Check the reading for the low level on the
oscilloscope screen is within the range between –2.2 V and –1.8 V.
Check the high level: Check the reading for the high level on the
oscilloscope screen is in the range between 1.8 V and 2.2 V.
b. Check the output level from D1 to D9:
H
Change the cable connection: Disconnect the SMB-to-BNC cable
from the DIGITAL DATA OUT:D0 connector and connect it to the
4-73
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
D1 connector. Proceed this step as changing the cable connection
from D1 to D9
H
Check the low level, high level and period: Do the procedures in step
4.a for each of DIGITAL DATA OUT connectors from D1 to D9.
5. End procedure: Retain the AWG520 settings.
Check Skew
Equipment
required
Two 50ĂΩ SMBĆtoĆBNC coaxial cables (same length), and
an oscilloscope.
Prerequisites
The instrument must meet the prerequisites listed on page 4-13.
1. Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator DIGITAL DATA OUT:D0 and D1 outputs through 50 Ω
SMB-to-BNC coaxial cables with the same length to the oscilloscope
CH1 and CH2 input connectors, respectively (see Figure 4–35).
AWG500 Series Waveform
Generator rear panel
Oscilloscope
CH1
CH2
Connect the SMB connectors
end to DIGITAL DATA
OUT:D0 and D1 connectors
50 W SMBĆtoĆBNC coaxial cable
50 W SMBĆtoĆBNC coaxial cable
Figure 4-35: Digital data output initial test hookup
b. Set the oscilloscope controls:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1 and CH2
CH1 and CH2 coupling . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 and CH2 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 V/div
CH1 and CH2 offset . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
CH1 and Ch2 input impedance . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 ms/div
4-74
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
2. Measure the delay time at any combination of two digital data outputs:
a. Write the delay time read from the oscilloscope screen.
b. Do the step a as changing the cable from the oscilloscope CH2 connector
to Dx to D9.
The Dx means the connector just right to the connector currently
connected to the oscilloscope CH1 connector. For example, if the D4 is
connected to the oscilloscope CH1 connector in step c, Dx will be D5.
c. Do the step a and b for any two digital data outputs as changing the
cable from the oscilloscope CH1 connector to D0 to D8.
3. Check the skew:
a. Find the maximum delay: Find the maximum delay time from the values
measured in step2 .
b. Check the skew: Check that the maximum delay time is equal to or less
than 1 ns.
4. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.
4-75
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Clock Output Tests
These procedures check the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator clock output
signal.
Equipment
required
A 50ĂΩ BNC coaxial cable, and an oscilloscope.
Prerequisites
The instrument must meet the prerequisites listed on page 4-13.
1. Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator CLOCK OUT output through a 50 Ω BNC coaxial cable to
the oscilloscope input connector (see Figure 4–36).
AWG500 Series Waveform
Generator rear panel
Oscilloscope
50 W coaxial cable
Connect the BNC
connector end to
CLOCK OUT connector
Figure 4-36: Clock output initial test hookup
b. Set the oscilloscope controls:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 V/div
CH1 offse t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -1.3 V
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 1 MW
Horizontal
Swe e p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5ns/div
Trigger
Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
4-76
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
2. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
Push UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
b. Select the waveform file: Load the MODE.WFM as referring to the
procedures on page 4–15.
c. Set the clock frequency:
H
H
Push HORIZONTAL MENU (front–panel)! Clock (side).
Enter numeric value of 50M: Push 5, 0 and M (SHIFT+7) keys in
this order.
3. Turn on the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator output: Push the RUN
button so that the LEDs above the RUN button lights.
4. Check the clock output signal: Check that the clock signal amplitude is equal
to or larger than 0.5 V, and the clock signal period is 20 ns.
5. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.
4-77
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Noise Output Tests
This procedure checks the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator noise output
characteristics.
Equipment
required
A 50ĂΩ coaxial cable, a DC block, an adapter (N male to BNC female),
and a spectrum analyzer.
Prerequisites
The instrument must meet the prerequisites listed on page 4-13.
1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:
a. Hook up the spectrum analyzer: Connect the AWG500–Series Waveform
Generator NOISE OUT connector through the coaxial cable, adapter,
and DC Block to the input connector on the spectrum analyzer (see
Figure 4–37).
AWG500 Series Waveform
Generator rear panel
Spectrum Analyzer
Adapter and
DC Block
50 W coaxial cable
Figure 4-37: Noise output initial test hookup
b. Set spectrum analyzer controls:
Ce nte r fre que ncy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHz
Full span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 MHz
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dB/div
Re fe re nce le ve l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .dB0/div
RF attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 dB
Video filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 kHz
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MHz
4-78
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
2. Set the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls and select the
waveform file:
a. Initialize the AWG500–Series Waveform Generator controls:
Push UTILITY (front–panel)!
System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)! OK (side).
b. Select the waveform file: Load the MODE.WFM as referring to the
procedures on page 4–15.
c. Set the noise on:
H
H
Push SETUP (front–panel)! NOISE (bottom)! Level (side).
Set the noise level to –105 dBm/Hz using the general purpose knob.
d. Set the noise on: Push the Output side button so that the On is selected
3. Check noise level:
a. Change the unit in the spectrum analyzer: Change the unit to dBm/Hz
when the dBm is currently set.
b. Check noise Level: Check that the noise level of the spectrum displayed
on the spectrum analyzer is –105 dBm/Hz "2.5 dBm/Hz at 100 MHz.
4. End procedure: Disconnect the spectrum analyzer.
4-79
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
4-80
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
This section contains information needed to manually adjust the
AWG510 and AWG520 Arbitrary Waveform Generators.
The section consists of two subsections:
H
H
Before Adjustments. Provides general information about adjusting the
waveform generator and the Performance Check/Adjustment disk files.
Adjustments. Procedures for manually adjusting the waveform generator.
Purpose
Use the Adjustments subsection to return the waveform generator to conformance
with performance specified in Section 1, Specifications. This procedure is not
required to verifywaveform generator performance; for performance verification
procedures refer to Section 4, Performance Verification.
Adjustment Interval
Generally, these adjustments should be done every 12 months.
Adjustment After Repair
After the removal and replacement of a module due to electrical failure, do the
adjustment procedures in this section.
Adjustments
There are six adjustment procedures, as listed in Table 5–1.
Table 5-1: Adjustments
Adjustments
Refer to
Clock frequency
Clock duty
Page 5-7
Page 5-9
Page 5-12
Page 5-15
Page 5-18
Page 5-20
DAC clock timing
DAC linearity
Noise output
LowĆvoltage power supply
NOTE. Whenever replacing the low-voltage power supply unit, do the procedure
Low-Voltage Power Supply on page 5–20.
5-1
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
Requirements for Adjustments
Before doing the adjustments, note the following requirements.
Personnel
This procedure is only to be performed by trained service technicians.
WarmĆUp Period
This waveform generator requires a 20 minute warm-up time in a 20_ C to
30_ C environment before it is adjusted. Adjustments done before the operating
temperature has stabilized may cause errors in performance.
Access
The cabinet must be removed and additional cooling fan must be provided when
making the adjustments in this procedure. Refer to Before Adjustments on the
next page for detailed information.
Self Calibration
Calibrate the waveform generator using the self calibration routine. Refer to the
subsection, Maintenance, in Section 4, Performance Verification for instructions.
Performance
These adjustment proceudres require loading a file from the Performance
Check/Adjustment disk supplied with the waveform generator. Refer to
Adjustment Instruntions in this subsection for information about this file.
Check/Adjustments Files
Test Equipment
Table 5–2 lists all test equipment required to adjust the waveform generator.
5-2
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
EquipmentRequired
Table 5–2 lists the test equipment required to adjust the waveform generator.
Table 5-2: Testequipment
Item description
Minimum requirements
Example
Purpose
1. Oscilloscope
Bandwidth > 500 MHz
Tektronix TDS784
Anritsu MF1603A
Output signal adjustments
Output signal adjustments
2. Frequency counter
1 MHz to 10 MHz
Accuracy < 0.2 ppm
3. Spetrum analizer
4. Digital multi meter
1 KHz to 1 GHz
Tektronix 497P or
Advantest R4131
Output signal adjustments
Check voltage.
DC volts range: 0.05 V to 10 V, Fluke 8842A
Accuracy: "0.1 %
5. BNC cable
Impedance 50 W
Tektronix part 012-0482-00
Signal interconnection
Signal interconnection
6. BNC to N adaptor
BNC female to N male
Tektronix part number
103Ć0045Ć00
7. DC block
8. Adjustment Tool
9. Fan
N type, 50 W
Tektronix part number
015Ć0509Ć00
DC block
Less than 1/8 inch diameter and
over 4 inches long
Manual adjustments
Cooling the waveform generator
Before Adjustments
The following instructions describe preparing the waveform generator for
adjustment, loading the adjustment file required for these procedures, and
making adjustments.
Providing Access
Before doing the adjustments, remove the waveform generator rear cover and
cabinet. See section 6, Maintenance, for instructions on removing the cabinet
and replacing it after adjustment is done.
CAUTION. To avoid damaging the eject button, remove the floppy disk (if present)
from the floppy disk drive before removing the cabinet.
5-3
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
Cooling
With the rear cover and cabinet removed, the waveform generator assembly does
not cool properly while power is applied. A separate fan is needed to prevent
heat build-up. Place the fan so it blows air to the A50 AWG board, as shown in
Figure 5–1.
CAUTION. To prevent damage to the waveform generator due to over-heating, do
not do the adjustment procedures without providing additional cooling, as
described below.
Figure 5-1: Cooling the waveform generator during adjustment procedures
5-4
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
Enabling Service Mode
The DAC clock timing adjustment procedure uses the Service menu in Utility.
To enter this menu, you must do the following step to enable service mode using
the switch on the A10/A11 Connector board:
H
Power on the waveform generator by pushing ON/STB button while
pressing the service switch on the A10/A11 Connector board. See Figure
5–2.
If you perform the adjustment procedure without removing the cabinet, you must
insert the adjustment tool (Item 8) in the hole on the left side of the waveform
generator about 4 inches to engage the service switch.
Powering off the waveform generator disables the service mode.
A10/A11 Connector board
Service switch
Adjustment tool
Figure 5-2: Accessing the service switch
5-5
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
Performance
Check/Adjustment Files
Table 5–3 lists the waveform files provided on the Performance Check/Adjust-
ment disk that is required to do the adjustments. The table lists the front-panel
settings that the file sets up and the adjustment procedures that use the files.
For instructions on loading files, see Loading Files on page 4–15. After loading
the files, press the floppy disk drive eject button and remove the floppy disk.
Table 5-3: File List for Performance Check/Adjustment Disk
No. File Name
WfmShape
WfmPoint Clock
Usage
1
2
3
MODE.WFM
TRI512.PAT
TRIM.PAT
1000
1 GHz
1 GHz
10 MHz
Clock frequency adjustĆ
ment
512
Clock duty adjustment
DAC delay adjustment
480
DAC linearity adjustment
NOTE. The files on the Performance Check/Adjustment disk are locked (the files
names are displayed with *), so the data in these files cannot be changed unless
the lock is opened. The file data includes not only waveform data, but also
output parameters.
When you select a file with the Waveform Sequence item, the waveform
generator output parameters change to those specified in the file, and the
waveform output reflects waveform data in the file. After selecting a file, do not
change an output parameter with the SETUP menu unless a procedure instructs
you to do so. During the procedures, if you are unsure that the waveform
generator settings still match the file’s settings, select the waveform again using
the Waveform Sequence item on the SETUP menu.
5-6
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
Adjustment Instructions
Clock Frequency
This procedure adjusts Y330 on the A40 Clock board to set the AWG500 clock
frequency.
Equipment
One frequency counter (Item 2)
Required
One 50 W coaxial cable (Item 5)
1. Connect the test equipment and set test equipment controls:
a. Connect the frequency counter: Connect the AWG500 Clock Output
connector through a BNC coaxial cable to the input A connector on the
frequency counter.
AWG500
Frequency counter
Clock output
Input
50 W coaxial cable
Figure 5-3: Hookup for the clock frequency adjustment
b. Set frequency counter controls:
Input A Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC
Funciton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A Frequency
Gate Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 s
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
2. Set AWG500 controls:
a. Initialize AWG500 controls: Press UTILITY Ý System Ý Factory
Reset Ý OK.
b. Load waveform:
H
H
Press SETUP Ý Waveform/Sequence Ý Load...
Turn the general purpose knob to display the list of waveform files
and highlight the file MODE.WFM.
5-7
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
H
Press OK to select and load the file.
c. Set clock frequency:
H
H
Press SETUP Ý Horizontal Ý Internal Clock.
Enter 10 MHz with numeric keypad and press Enter .
d. Start clock generation: Press RUN button.
3. Adjust clock frequency: Adjust Y330 on the Clock board (A40) so that the
frequency counter reading is in the range of 10.0 MHz ±2 Hz (0.2 ppm).
A40 Clock board
Adjustment pod
Y330
A40 Clock board
Figure 5-4: Adjustment location for clock frequency
4. End procedure: Disconnect the frequency counter.
5-8
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
Clock Duty
This procedure adjusts R5004 on the A50 AWG board to set the clock duty of
the AWG circuits. See Figure 5–6 on page 5–11 for the adjustment location .
Equipment
One oscilloscope (Item1)
Required
One 50 W coaxial cable (Item5)
1. Install test equipment connections and set test equipment controls:
a. Connect the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG500 CH 1 output connector
through a BNC coaxial cable to the CH 1 input connector on the
oscilloscope.
AWG500
Oscilloscope
50 W coaxial cable
Figure 5-5: Hookup for the clock dutyadjustment
b. Set oscilloscope controls:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH 1
CH 1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH 1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 V/div
CH 1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 ns/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH 1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
5-9
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
2. Set the waveform generator controls:
a. Initialize AWG500 controls: Press UTILITY Ý System Ý Factory
Reset Ý OK.
b. Load and start CH 1 waveform:
H
H
H
H
Press SETUP Ý Waveform/Sequence Ý Load... Ý Drive...
Turn the general purpose knob to select Floppy.
Push OK.
Turn the general purpose knob to display the list of waveform files
and highlight the file TRI512.PAT.
H
H
H
Push OK to select and load the file.
Push RUN button.
Push CH 1 OUTPUT button to ON.
3. Adjust clock duty:
H
H
Set R5004 trimmer position to the center.
Rotate left slowly R5004 from center position to find the position of
output waveform corrupted. Mark the position as (L).
H
H
Set R5004 trimmer position to the center and restart waveform
generation by press RUN button twice (STOP and START).
Rotate right slowly R5004 from center position to find the position
of output waveform corrupted. Mark the position as (R).
H
H
Set R5004 position to the middle of (L) and (R).
Restart waveform generation by press RUN button twice (STOP and
START) and make sure the output waveform is not corrupted.
4. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.
5-10
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
R7025
R7026
R5004
A50 AWG board
R6025
R6026
A50 AWG board
Figure 5-6: Adjustment location for clock duty, timing, and linearity
5-11
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
DAC Clock Timing
This procedure adjusts variable delay setting on the A50 AWG board for
theDAC clock timing. See Figure 5–6 on page 5–11 for the adjustment location.
Equipment
One oscilloscope (Item1)
Required
One 50 W coaxial cable (Item5)
1. Connect the test equipment and set test equipment controls:
a. Connect the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG500 CH 1 output connector
through a BNC coaxial cable to the CH 1 input connector on the
oscilloscope.
AWG500
Oscilloscope
50 W coaxial cable
Figure 5-7: Hookup for the DAC clock timing adjustment
b. Set oscilloscope controls:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH 1
CH 1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH 1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 mV/div
CH 1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 ns/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH 1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
5-12
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
2. Set the waveform generator controls:
a. Initialize AWG500 controls: Press UTILITY Ý System Ý Factory
Reset Ý OK.
b. Load CH 1 waveform:
H
H
Press SETUP Ý Waveform/Sequence Ý Load...
Turn the general purpose knob to display the list of waveform files
and highlight the file TRI512.PAT.
H
Press OK to select and load the file.
c. Start waveform generation:
H
Press CH 1 OUTPUT button.
The following steps d and e are for the AWG520 only. For the AWG510, go
to the step 3.
d. Load CH 2 waveform: (for AWG520 only)
H
H
H
Press CH 2 button to select the channel.
Press SETUP Ý Waveform/Sequence Ý Load...
Turn the general purpose knob to display the list of waveform files
and highlight the file TRI512.PAT.
H
Press OK to select and load the file.
e. Start waveform generation:
H
Press CH 2 OUTPUT button.
3. Enter DAC adjust menu: Press UTILITY Ý Service Ý Tweak AWG1 Ý
OK.
4. Adjust CH 1 DAC clock timing:
a. Set AWG500 controls: Press CH1 Delay.
b. Adjust timing:
H
H
Turn the general purpose knob to find the setting at which the output
waveform corrupts. The value should be near 40.
Turn the general purpose knob to find the lower limit for the
waveform corrupted area. Note the value as N1.
5-13
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
H
H
Turn the general purpose knob to find the upper limit for the
waveform corrupted area. Note the value as N2.
Calculate (N1+N2)/2–28 and set the value to it. That is the proper
setting. For example, if N1=40 and N2=50, then set the value to 17.
The following step 5 is for the AWG520 only. For the AWG510, go to the step 6.
5. Adjust CH 2 DAC clock timing: (for AWG520 only)
a. Modify the AWG500 hookup: Disconnect the coaxial cable on the CH 1
output connector and connect it to the CH 2 output connector.
b. Set AWG500 controls: Press CH2 Delay.
c. Adjust timing:
H
H
H
H
Turn the general purpose knob to find the setting of output wave-
form corrupted. The value should be near 40.
Turn the general purpose knob to find the lower limit for waveform
corrupted area. Note the value as N1.
Turn the general purpose knob to find the upper limit for waveform
corrupted area. Note the value as N2.
Calculate (N1+N2)/2–28 and set the value to it. That is proper
setting.
6. Save the settings: Press Save.
7. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.
5-14
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
DAC Linearity
This procedure adjusts R6025, R6026, R7025 (AWG520), and R7026
(AWG520) on the A50 AWG board for the DAC Linearity. See Figure 5–6 for
the adjustment location on page 5–11.
Equipment
One oscilloscope (Item1)
Required
One 50 W coaxial cable (Item5)
1. Connect the test equipment and set test equipment controls:
a. Connect the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG500 CH 1 output connector
through a BNC coaxial cable to the CH 1 input connector on the
oscilloscope.
AWG500
Oscilloscope
50 W coaxial cable
Figure 5-8: Hookup for the DAC linearity adjustment
b. Set oscilloscope controls:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH 1
CH 1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH 1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mV/div
CH 1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ms/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH 1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
5-15
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
2. Set AWG500 controls:
a. Initialize AWG500 controls: Press UTILITY Ý System Ý Factory
Reset Ý OK.
b. Load waveform:
H
H
Press SETUP Ý Waveform/Sequence Ý Load...
Turn the general purpose knob to display the list of waveform files
and highlight the file TRIM.PAT (triangle waveform; 10 MS/s).
H
Press OK to select and load the file.
c. Start waveform generation:
H
H
Press RUN button.
Press CH 1 OUTPUT button.
3. Adjust CH 1 DAC linearity:
a. Make sure that the position of R6025 and R6026 is near center.
b. Adjust low range bits of the DAC: Adjust R6026 on the AWG (A50)
board so that rise and fall slope to be linear.
c. Adjust mid range bits of the DAC: Adjust R6025 on the AWG (A50)
board so that rise and fall slope to be linear.
d. Readjust low range bits of the DAC: Adjust R6026 on the AWG (A50)
board so that rise and fall slope to be linear.
The following steps 4 and 5 are for the AWG520 only. For the AWG510, go to
the step 6.
4. Setup for CH 2 DAC Adjust: (AWG520 only)
a. Connect the oscilloscope: Disconnect the BNC on CH 1 output, then
connect it to the AWG500 CH 2 output connector.
b. Load waveform to CH 2:
H
H
H
Push CH 2 button
Press SETUP Ý Waveform/Sequence Ý Load...
Turn the general purpose knob to display the list of waveform files
and highlight the file TRIM.PAT (triangle waveform; 10 MS/s).
H
Press OK to select and load the file.
5-16
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
c. Start waveform generation:
H
Press CH 2 OUTPUT button.
5. Adjust CH 2 DAC linearity: (AWG520 only)
a. Make sure that the position of R7025 and R7026 is near center.
b. Adjust low range bits of the DAC: Adjust R7026 on the AWG (A50)
board so that rise and fall slope to be linear.
c. Adjust mid range bits of the DAC: Adjust R7025 on the AWG (A50)
board so that rise and fall slope to be linear.
d. Readjust low range bits of the DAC: Adjust 76026 on the AWG (A50)
board so that rise and fall slope to be linear.
6. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.
5-17
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
Noise Output
This procedure adjusts the AWG500 noise output level.
Equipment
One spectrum analyzer (Item 1)
Required
One50 W coaxial cable(Item 5)
Oneadapter; BNC femaleto N male(Item 6)
OneDC block (Item 7)
1. Connect the test equipment and set test equipment controls:
a. Connect the the spectrum analyzer: Connect the AWG500 NOISE OUT
connector through the coaxial cable, adapter, and DC Block to the input
connector on the spectrum analyzer (see Figure 4–37).
AWG500 front panel
Spectrum Analyzer
497P
Adaptor and
DC Block
50 W coaxial cable
Figure 5-9: Hookup for the noise output adjustment
b. Set spectrum analyzer controls:
Ce nte r fre que ncy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 MHz
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dB/div
Re fe re nce le ve l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .dB0/div
RF attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 dB
Video filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 kHz
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MHz
5-18
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
2. Set the AWG500 controls and select the waveform file:
a. Initialize the AWG500 controls: Select UTILITY ! System ! Factory
Reset → OK.
b. Set the noise on:
H
H
Select SETUP ! NOISE ! Level.
Set the noise level to –105 dB/Hz using the general purpose knob.
c. Set the noise on: Press Output side button so that the On is selected
3. Adjust noise level:
a. Adjust noise level: Adjust R237 (see Figure 5–10) so that the noise level
of the spectrum displayed on the spectrum analyzer is –105 dBm/Hz
"2.5 dBm/Hz at 100 MHz.
4. End procedure: Disconnect the spectrum analyzer.
A75 Noise Generator
board
R237
A75 Noise Generator board
Figure 5-10: Adjustment location for noise level
5-19
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
LowĆVoltage Power
Supply
This procedure adjusts the level of the low-voltage power supply.
NOTE. Do this procedure only when replacing the low-voltage power supply unit.
Equipment
One digital multi meter (Item 4)
Required
H
Adjust the voltage level: Adjust –5 V pod on the power supply unit so that
TP103 (VEE) on the A10/A11 Connector board is –4.60 V± 0.02 V.
See Figure 5–11.
A10/A11 Connector board
TP103
A10/A11 Connector board
V.ADJ
-5V +5V -2V
Figure 5-11: Adjustment location for the power supply unit
5-20
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
This section contains the information needed to do periodic and corrective
maintenance on the AWG510 and AWG520 Arbitrary Waveform Generators.
The following subsections are included:
H
H
H
H
Preparation — Introduction plus general information on preventing damage
to internal modules when doing maintenance.
Inspection and Cleaning — Information and procedures for inspecting the
waveform generator and cleaning its external and internal modules.
Removal and Installation Procedures — Procedures for the removal of
defective modules and replacement of new or repaired modules.
Troubleshooting — Information for isolating failed modules. Included are
instructions for operating the waveform generator’s internal diagnostic
routines and troubleshooting trees. Most of the trees make use of these
internal diagnostic routines to speed fault isolation to a module.
Related Maintenance Procedures
The following sections contain information and procedures related to mainte-
nance.
H
Section 2, Operating Information, covers instructions useful when operating
the waveform generator in order to troubleshoot it. It also details the service
strategy and lists options for obtaining maintenance service and for replacing
failed modules.
H
H
Section 3, Theory of Operation, contains a circuit description at the module,
or block, level.
Section 4, Performance Verification, contains procedures that may be useful
in isolating problems to modules by testing the waveform generator
performance.
H
H
H
Section 5, Adjustment Procedures, addresses after repair adjustment and the
interval between periodic adjustments. It contains a procedure for adjusting
the internal circuits of the waveform generator.
Section 9, Diagrams, contains a block diagram using individual modules as
blocks and an interconnection diagram showing connections between the
modules.
Section 10, Mechanical Parts List, lists all field replaceable modules by part
number.
6-1
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Preparation
Before servicing this product, read the Safety Summary and Introduction at the
front of the manual and the ESD information below.
CAUTION. Static discharge can damage any semiconductor component in this
generator.
Preventing ESD
When performing any service which requires internal access to the waveform
generator, adhere to the following precautions to avoid damaging internal
modules and their components due to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
1. Minimize handling of static-sensitive modules.
2. Transport and store static-sensitive modules in their static protected
containers or on a metal rail. Label any package that contains static-sensitive
modules.
3. Discharge the static voltage from your body by wearing a grounded antistatic
wrist strap while handling these modules. Do service of static-sensitive
modules only at a static-free work station.
4. Nothing capable of generating or holding a static charge should be allowed
on the work station surface.
5. Handle circuit boards by the edges when possible.
6. Do not slide the modules over any surface.
7. Avoid handling modules in areas that have a floor or work-surface covering
capable of generating a static charge.
6-2
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Susceptibility to ESD
Table 6–1 lists the relative susceptibility of various classes of semiconductors.
Static voltages of 1 kV to 30 kV are common in unprotected environments.
Table 6-1: Relative susceptibility to staticĆdischarge damage
1
Semiconductor classes
Relative susceptibility levels
MOS or CMOS microcircuits or discrete circuits, or linear
microcircuits with MOS inputs (most sensitive)
1
ECL
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Schottky signal diodes
Schottky TTL
HighĆfrequency bipolar transistors
JFET
Linear microcircuits
LowĆpower Schottky TTL
TTL (least sensitive)
1
Voltage equivalent for levels (voltage discharged from a 100ĂpF capacitor through
resistance of 100 ohms):
1Ă=Ă100 to 500 V
2 = 200 to 500 V
3 = 250 V
6 = 600 to 800 V
7 = 400 to 1000 V (est.)
8 = 900 V
4 = 500 V
9 = 1200 V
5 = 400 to 600 V
6-3
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Inspection and Cleaning
Inspection and Cleaning describes how to inspect for dirt and damage. It also
describes how to clean the exterior and interior of the AWG510 and AWG520
Arbitrary Waveform Generators. Inspection and cleaning are done as preventive
maintenance. Preventive maintenance, when done regularly, may prevent the
waveform generator malfunctions and enhance its reliability.
Preventive maintenance consists of visually inspecting and cleaning the
waveform generator and using general care when operating it.
How often to do maintenance depends on the severity of the environment in
which the waveform generator is used. A proper time to perform preventive
maintenance is just before generator adjustment.
General Care
The cabinet helps keep dust out of the waveform generator and should normally
be in place when operating the generator. The generator’s front cover protects the
front panel and display from dust and damage. Install it when storing or
transporting the generator.
Inspection and Cleaning
Procedures
Inspect and clean the waveform generator as often as operating conditions
require. The collection of dirt on components inside can cause them to overheat
and breakdown. (Dirt acts as an insulating blanket, preventing efficient heat
dissipation.) Dirt also provides an electrical conduction path that could cause an
generator failure, especially under high-humidity conditions.
CAUTION. Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents which might damage the
plastics used in this waveform generator. Use only deionized water when
cleaning the menu buttons or front-panel buttons. Use a ethyl alcohol solution as
a cleaner and rinse with deionized water.
6-4
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Inspection Ċ Exterior. Inspect the outside of the generator for damage, wear, and
missing parts, using Table 6–2 as a guide. Waveform generators that appear to
have been dropped or otherwise abused should be checked thoroughly to verify
correct operation and performance. Immediately repair defects that could cause
personal injury or cause further generator damage.
Table 6-2: External Inspection Check List
Item
Inspect For
Repair Action
Cabinet, front panel,
and cover
Cracks, scratches, deformations, Repair or replace defective
damaged hardware or gaskets.
module.
FrontĆpanel knobs
Missing, damaged, or loose
knobs.
Repair or replace missing or
defective knobs.
Connectors
Broken shells, cracked insulation, Repair or replace defective
modules. Clear or wash out dirt.
and deformed contacts. Dirt in
connectors.
Carrying handle, bail,
cabinet feet.
Correct operation.
Repair or replace defective
module.
Accessories
Missing items or parts of items,
bent pins, broken or frayed
cables, and damaged connecĆ
tors.
Repair or replace damaged or
missing items, frayed cables, and
defective modules.
Cleaning Procedure Ċ Exterior. Do the following steps to clean the waveform
generator exterior:
1. Remove loose dust on the outside of the generator with a lint free cloth.
2. Remove remaining dirt with a lint free cloth dampened in a general purpose
detergent-and-water solution. Do not use abrasive cleaners.
3. Clean the light filter protecting the monitor screen with a lint-free cloth
dampened with either ethyl alcohol or, preferably, a gentle, general purpose
detergent-and-water solution.
CAUTION. To prevent getting moisture inside the generator during external
cleaning, use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator.
6-5
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Inspection Ċ Interior. To access the inside of the waveform generator for
inspection and cleaning, refer to the Removal and Installation Procedures in this
section.
Inspect the internal portions of the generator for damage and wear, using
Table 6–3 as a guide. Defects found should be repaired immediately.
CAUTION. To prevent damage from electrical arcing, ensure that circuit boards
and components are dry before applying power to the waveform generator..
Table 6-3: Internal inspection check list
Item
Inspect for
Repair action
Circuit boards
Loose, broken, or corroded
solderconnections. Burned
circuit boards. Burned, broken, or
cracked circuitĆrun plating.
Remove failed module and
replace with a new module.
Resistors
Burned, cracked, broken, blisĆ
tered condition.
Remove failed module and
replace with a new module.
Solderconnections
Capacitors
Cold solderorrosin joints.
Resolderjoint and clean with
ethyl alcohol.
Damaged orleaking cases.
Corroded solder on leads or
terminals.
Remove damaged module and
replace with a new module from
the factory.
Semiconductors
Loosely inserted in sockets.
Distorted pins.
Firmly seat loose semiconducĆ
tors. Remove devices that have
distorted pins. Carefully straightĆ
en pins (as required to fit the
socket), using longĆnose pliers,
and reinsert firmly. Ensure that
straightening action does not
crack pins, causing them to
break off.
Wiring and cables
Chassis
Loose plugs orconnectors.
Burned, broken, or frayed wiring. replace modules with defective
wires or cables.
Firmly seat connectors. Repair or
Dents, deformations, and damĆ
aged hardware.
Straighten, repair, or replace
defective hardware.
6-6
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Cleaning Procedure Ċ Interior. Do the following steps to clean the generator
interior:
1. Blow off dust with dry, low-pressure, deionized air (approximately 9 psi).
2. Remove any remaining dust with a lint-free cloth dampened in ethpyl
alcohol and rinse with warm deionized water. (A cotton-tipped applicator is
useful for cleaning in narrow spaces and on circuit boards.)
STOP. If, after doing steps 1 and 2, a module is clean upon inspection, skip the
remaining steps.
3. If steps 1 and 2 do not remove all the dust or dirt, the generator may be spray
washed using a solution of ethyl alcohol by doing steps 4
through 8.
4. Gain access to the parts to be cleaned by removing easily accessible shields
and panels (see Removal and Installation Procedures).
5. Spray wash dirty parts with the ethyl alcohol and wait 60 seconds for the
majority of the alcohol to evaporate.
6. Use hot (120_ F to 140_ F) deionized water to thoroughly rinse boards and
components.
7. Dry all parts with low-pressure, deionized air.
8. Dry all components and assemblies in an oven or drying compartment using
low-temperature (125_ F to 150_ F) circulating air.
Lubrication. There is no periodic lubrication required for this generator.
6-7
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
6-8
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
This subsection contains procedures for removal and installation of all mechani-
cal and electrical modules. Any electrical or mechanical module, assembly, or
part listed in Section 10 of this manual is a module.
Preparation Ċ Please Read
WARNING. Before doing this or any other procedure in this manual, read the
Safety Summary found at the beginning of this manual. Also, to prevent possible
injury to service personnel or damage to this generator’s components, read
Installation in Section 2, and Preventing ESD in this section.
This subsection contains the following items:
H
This preparatory information that you need to properly do the procedures
that follow.
H
H
List of tools required to remove and disassemble all modules.
Three module locator diagrams for finding the External Modules (see
Figure 6–2), Outer-Chassis Modules (see Figure 6–3), and Inner-Chassis
Modules (see Figure 6–4) in this generator.
H
H
Procedures for removal and reinstallation of the electrical and mechanical
modules.
A disassembly procedure for removal of all the major modules from the
generator at one time and for reassembly of those modules. A complete
disassembly is normally only done when completely cleaning the generator.
(Instructions for doing the actual cleaning are found under Inspection and
Cleaning at the beginning of this section.)
H
Module disassembly procedures.
WARNING. Before doing any procedure in this subsection, disconnect the power
cord from the line voltage source. Failure to do so could cause serious injury or
death.
6-9
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
List of Modules
Section 10 lists all modules.
General Instructions
STOP. READ THESE GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE REMOVING A
MODULE.
First read over the Summary of Procedures that follows to understand how the
procedures are grouped. Then read Equipment Required for a list of the tools
needed to remove and install modules in this waveform generator.
If you are removing a module for service, begin by doing the Access Procedure
procedure on page 6–16. By following the instructions in that procedure, you
remove the module to be serviced while removing the minimum number of
additional modules.
Summary of Procedures
The procedures are described in the order in which they appear in this section. In
addition, you can look up any procedure for removal and reinstallation of any
module in the Table of Contents of this manual.
H
The Access Procedure on page 6–16 first directs you to the procedure(s) (if
any) that are required to access the module to be serviced, then it directs you
to the procedure to remove that module.
H
H
Procedures for External Modules on page 6–17 are procedures for removing
modules that do not require internal access to the generator.
Procedures for Outer-Chassis Modules on page 6–30 are procedures for
removing modules the removal of which require access internal to the
instrument but external to the chassis.
H
Procedures for Inner-Chassis Modules on page 6–44 are procedures for
removing modules the removal of which require access internal to the
instrument and internal to the chassis.
6-10
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Equipment Required. Most modules in this generator can be removed with a
screwdriver with a size #2, Phillips tip. Use this tool whenever a procedure step
instructs you to remove or install a screw unless a different size screwdriver is
specified in that step. All equipment required to remove and reinstall a module
are listed in the first step of each procedure.
Table 6-4: Tools required for module removal
Item
No.
Tektronix Part
Number
Name
Description
1
2
3
4
Screwdriver handle
#1 Phillips tip
Accepts Phillips-driver bits
Phillips-driver bit for #1 screw size
Phillips-driver bit for #2 screw size
#2 Phillips tip
Flat-blade screwdriver
Screwdriver for removing standard-
headed screws
5
Needle-Nose Pliers
Standard tool
1
6
Nutdriver,
@
inch
Standard tool
2
7
Nutdriver, 5 mm
Nutdriver, 7 mm
Retaining Ring Pliers
AngleĆTip Tweezers
Soldering Iron
Pliers
Standard tool
8
Standard tool
9
Standard tool
10
11
12
13
14
Standard tool
Standard tool
Standard tool
Solder Wick
Standard tool
Adhesive
TRAĆCON: TraĆBond #BAĆ2114
6-11
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
AWG510 and AWG520
Orientation
In this manual, procedures refer to “front,” “right,” “top,” etc. of the waveform
generator. Figure 6–1 shows how the sides are referenced.
Figure 6-1: AWG510 and AWG520 Orientation
6-12
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Cabinet
Fuse cap
Line fuse
Line cord
Handle
EMI gasket
Handle cap
Foot
Display
frame
Flip stand
Front panel
knobs
Menubuttons
Output
cover
A20 Front panel
assembly
Trim ring
Figure 6-2: External modules
6-13
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Power supply
A10/A11 Connector
board
Rear chassis
Fan
Floppy disk
drive
A50 AWG board
A71 (AWG510)/
A72 (AWG520)
Output board
A75 Noise Generator
board
A40 Clock board
A60 Memory board
Figure 6-3: OuterĆchassis modules
6-14
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
CPU module
Hard disk /
Flash disk
Ethernet LAN interface
GPIB interface
CPU unit
Display assembly
Main chassis
Front subpanel
Figure 6-4: InnerĆchassis modules
6-15
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Access Procedure
Begin with this procedure when you have identified a module to be removed for
service and have read General Instructions found earlier in this section.
1. Locate module to be removed:
a. Find the module to be removed in the module locator diagrams,
Figures 6–2 through 6–4.
b. Once the module is found, note from the title of the figure whether the
module is an external, outer-chassis mounted, or inner-chassis mounted
part.
2. If the module is externally mounted, no internal access is required; remove
the module: Find and do the procedure whose title matches the name of the
module to be removed under Procedures for External Modules (page 6–17).
3. If the module is an outer- or inner-chassis module, access the inside of the
instrument:
a. First do the procedure Line Fuse and Line Cord; then do the procedure
Cabinet. Both are found under Procedures for External Modules
immediately following this procedure.
b. After completing those procedures, return to this procedure and continue
with step 4.
4. If the module is an outer-chassis module, remove it:
a. If removing the attenuator or display-frame assembly, first do the
procedure Trim Ring, Menu Buttons, and Output Panel, found under
Procedures for External Modules (page 6–17).
b. Find and do the procedure whose title matches the name of the module
to be removed under Procedures for Outer-Chassis Modules, on
page 6–30.
6-16
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
5. If the module is an inner-chassis module, access the inner-chassis:
a. If removing the display tube, display-driver board, or the front subpanel,
first do the procedure Trim Ring, Menu Buttons, and Output Panel,
found under Procedures for External Modules. Also remove the
display-frame assembly found under Procedures for External Modules,
on page 6–17.
b. Also, if removing the front subpanel, do A20 Front-Panel Assembly also
found under Procedures for External Modules.
c. Do the procedure A10/A11 Connector Board found under Procedures for
Outer-Chassis Modules, page 6–30.
d. Find and do the procedure whose title matches the name of the module
to be removed under Procedures for Inner-Chassis Modules, page 6–44.
6. Reinstall all modules removed: Read the instructions found at the end of the
procedure that removes the module to be service. These instructions will
guide you in reinstalling all modules removed.
Procedures for External Modules
Do the Access Procedure (page 6–16) before doing any procedure in this
collection.
The following procedures are found here and are listed in order presented.
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Front-Panel Knobs
Line Fuse and Line Cord
EMI Gaskets
Cabinet
Trim Ring, Menu Buttons, and Output Panel
A20 Front-Panel Assembly
Display Frame Assembly
Cabinet Modules
6-17
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
FrontĆPanel Knobs
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed: Have an angled-tip
tweezers (Item 10) handy. Find the knob(s) to be removed on the front panel.
2. Orient the waveform generator: Set the generator so its bottom is down on
the work surface and its front is facing you.
3. Remove the knob(s): Grasp any knob you want to remove and pull it straight
out from the front panel slightly to create some clearance between the base
of the knob and the front panel. Insert the tweezers between the knob and
front panel and use them to remove the knob. See Figure 6–5.
4. Reinstallation: To reinstall, align knob to shaft and push it in until it snaps
into place.
When reinstalling the
knobs, note there are three
sizes. Be sure to reinstall
the proper size knob in the
proper location.
Figure 6-5: Knob Removal
6-18
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Line Fuse and Line Cord
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed: Have a flat-blade
screwdriver (Item 4) handy. Locate the line fuse and line cord in the locator
diagram External modules, Figure 6–2.
2. Orient the generator: Set the generator so its bottom is down on the work
surface and its rear is facing you. If you are servicing the line fuse, do the
next step; if you are servicing the line cord, skip to step 4.
3. Remove line fuse: Find the fuse cap on the rear panel. (See Figure 6–6.)
Now, remove the fuse cap by turning it counterclockwise using a flat-blade
screwdriver, and remove the line fuse. Reverse procedure to reinstall.
4. Remove line cord: Find the line cord on the rear cover. (See Figure 6–6.)
Pull the line cord to complete the removal. Reverse procedure to reinstall.
5. Reinstallation: Do in reverse steps 3 and 4 to reinstall the line cord and then
the line fuse.
Line Fuse
Fuse Cap
Figure 6-6: Line Fuse and Line Cord Removal
6-19
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
EMI Gaskets
Cabinet
See Cabinet procedure below.
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:
a. Have handy a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Items 1 and 3).
b. Make sure the generator’s front cover (optional accessory) is installed;
if it’s not, install it by snapping its edges over the trim ring.
c. Locate the cabinet in the locator diagram External modules, Figure 6–2.
2. Orient the generator: Set the generator so its face is down with its front
cover on the work surface and its bottom facing you.
3. Disconnect the line cord: Unplug the line cord from its receptacle at the rear
cover.
4. Remove the cabinet:
a. At the rear of the cabinet, remove the six screws securing the two feet.
b. At the rear of the cabinet, grasp its left and right edges.
c. Pull upward to slide the cabinet off the generator. Take care not to bind
or snag the cabinet on the generator’s internal cabling as you remove it.
STOP. DO NOT do steps 5 through 7 to remove the EMI gasket(s) unless they
must be replaced due to damage. If you are not replacing those gaskets, skip to
step 8.
When reinstalling EMI gaskets and/or the generator cabinet, carefully follow the
instructions given. Unless they are performed properly, the generator may not
meet its emissions requirements (EMI).
5. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:
a. Have handy a pair of needle-nose pliers (Item 6).
b. Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram External
modules, Figure 6–2.
6-20
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
6. Remove the EMI gaskets:
a. Look for the point where the ends of the gasket touch in the channel at
the rear edge of the cabinet.
b. Use a pair of needle-nose pliers to pry up one of the ends.
c. Grasp the EMI gasket, and gently pull it out of the its channel.
d. Repeat substeps a through c to remove the gasket from its channel on the
front casting.
7. Reinstallation of EMI gaskets: Press each EMI gasket back into its groove at
the rear edge of the cabinet or front casting. Make sure the ends of the gasket
touch, but do not overlap, when installing. (Cut off excess length if required
to prevent overlap.)
8. Reinstallation of cabinet and rear cover:
a. Do in reverse order steps 3 and 4 to reinstall the cabinet.
b. Take care not to bind or snag the cabinet on internal cabling; redress
cables an necessary.
c. When sliding the cabinet, be sure that the front edge of the cabinet aligns
with the groove containing the EMI shield on the front casting.
d. Be sure that the ridge around the rear chassis slides into the groove
containing a second EMI cable on the rear of the cabinet.
e. When reinstalling the four screws at the rear panel, tighten them to
16 foot-lbs torque.
f. See the procedure Line Fuse and Line Cord to reinstall the line cord,
which completes the generator reassembly.
6-21
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Figure 6-7: Cabinet removal
6-22
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Trim Ring, Menu Buttons,
and Output Panel
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed: No tools are needed.
Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram External modules,
Figure 6–2.
2. Orient the generator: Set the generator so its rear is down on the work
surface and its bottom is facing you.
3. Remove the front cover: Grasp the front cover by its left and right edges and
snap it off of the front subpanel. When reinstalling, align and snap back on.
See Figure 6–8.
Trim Ring. When removing the
trim ring, grasp its back edge
and vigorously flex it upward
before pulling it forward.
Menubuttons
Output panel
Figure 6-8: Trim ring, Menu buttons, and Output panel removal
STOP. DO NOT touch the carbon contact points on the menu buttons installed in
the trim ring. Also, do not touch the contacts on the flex circuit exposed when
you remove the trim ring.
6-23
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
4. Remove the trim ring: Grasp the trim ring by its top edge and pry it up and
lift it forward to snap it off of the front subpanel. If servicing the menu
buttons, lift them out of the trim ring. (When reinstalling, reinsert the menu
buttons, align the trim ring to the front subpanel and press it back on.)
5. Remove the output panel: Gently pry, using your fingers, the snap-off/snap-
on output panel away from the front subpanel to remove it. (When reinstal-
ling, use your hands to press it back on.)
6. Reinstallation: Do in reverse steps 3–5 to reinstall the output panel, menu
buttons, and trim ring, following the reinstallation instructions found in each
step.
A20 FrontĆPanel Assembly
NOTE. This procedure includes removal and reinstallation instructions for the
front panel and front panel buttons. Unless either of those modules are being
serviced, do not do step 4, “Further disassembly of front-panel assembly.”
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:
a. Have handy a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Items 1 and 3).
b. Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram External
modules, Figure 6–2.
c. Do the procedure Trim Ring, Menu Buttons, and Output Panel, steps
1–5, immediately preceding this procedure.
2. Orient the waveform generator: Set the generator so its bottom is down on
the work surface and its front is facing you.
3. Remove the front-panel assembly:
a. Lift the front-panel assembly out of the front subpanel until you can
reach the interconnect cable connecting it to the Connector board.
b. Disconnect that cable at J121 of the Connector board. Disconnect the
flex-board connector at P3 of the front-panel assembly. (The flex board
is part of the display-frame assembly). See Figure 6–9.
c. Finally, lift the front-panel assembly out of the front subpanel to
complete the removal.
6-24
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
P3
To J121
on the Connector
board
FrontĆPanel assembly
Back of
Front-Panel
assembly
P2
Figure 6-9: A20 FrontĆPanel Assembly removal
6-25
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
4. Further disassembly of front-panel assembly: If the front panel or the
front-panel buttons are to be serviced, do the following substeps:
a. Remove the front-panel control knobs from the front-panel assembly
using the method described in Front-Panel Knobs on page 6–18.
b. Remove the eight screws mounting the front-panel board to the front
panel.
c. Now hand disassemble the front-panel assembly components using
Figure 6–10 as a guide. Reverse procedure to reassemble, again using
Figure 6–10 as a guide.
Figure 6-10: Disassembly of FrontĆPanel Assembly
6-26
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
5. Reinstallation: If the front-panel assembly was further disassembled in
step 4, then reverse substeps 4a–4c to reassemble, using Figure 6–10 as a
guide. Then do step 3, reversing the procedure outlined in each substep.
Last, reinstall the trim ring and, if desired, the front cover, referring to the
procedure Trim Ring, Menu Buttons, and Output Panel (page 6–23).
DisplayĆFrame Assembly
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed: Have handy a
screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Items 1 and 3). Locate the modules to
be removed in the locator diagram External Modules, Figure 6–2, page 6–13.
2. Orient the waveform generator : Set the generator so its bottom is down on
the work surface and its front is facing you.
3. Remove the display-frame assembly:
a. Do the procedure Trim Ring, Menu Buttons, and Output Panel (page
6–23) to remove the front cover and trim ring.
b. Lift the front-panel assembly out of the front subpanel until you can
reach P2 on the front-panel assembly. Disconnect the flex cable coming
from the display-frame assembly at P3 of the front-panel assembly.
c. Do the procedure Floppy Disk (page 6–31) to remove the floppy disk
drive.
d. Remove the three screws securing the display-frame assembly to the
front subpanel and remove that assembly.
4. Reinstallation:
a. Do, in reverse order, substeps 3b–3d, reversing each step to reinstall the
display-frame assembly. Then see the procedure Trim Ring, Menu
Buttons, and Output Panel (page 6–23) to complete reassembly of the
generator.
Cabinet Modules
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed: Have handy a pair
of needle-nose pliers (Item 5). Locate the modules to be removed in the
locator diagram External modules (see Figure 6–2).
2. Orient the waveform generator: Set the generator so the left side is down on
the work surface and its handle is facing upwards.
6-27
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
3. Remove the handle:
a. Insert the tips of a pair of needle-nose pliers (Item 5) into the hole of
either handle cap. Push and hold to depress the handle release.
b. While holding the handle released, pull it out of the slot in the handle
cap. Repeat procedure to remove the handle from the other handle cap.
c. Reverse procedure to reinstall.
4. Remove the handle caps:
a. Insert the retaining ring pliers (Item 9) into the opening created in the
handle cap when you removed the handle.
b. While using the pliers to expand the handle cap outward, grasp it and
snap it off.
c. Repeat procedure to remove the remaining cap as needed; push the
cap(s) back on to reinstall.
5. Remove the flip stand: Grasp the flip stand by both sides near where it joins
each flip stand foot. Now compress the flip stand until the flip stand ends
clear the flip stand feet to complete the removal.
6. Remove the flip stand foot (or feet):
a. Do Cabinet procedure (page 6–20) to gain access to inside of the
cabinet.
b. Working from inside the cabinet, push the two retainers to release the
flip stand foot you wish to remove and lift it away from the outside of
the cabinet.
c. Repeat procedure to remove as many of the remaining feet as needed;
insert the two retainers back in their slots in the cabinet and snap into
place any flip stand foot removed.
7. Reinstallation: If any flip stand feet were removed, reinstall as directed in
step 6c; then see Cabinet procedure (page 6–20) to reinstall the rear cover
and cabinet. Do in reverse order steps 3 and 5, reversing each step, to
reinstall the flip stand, then the handle caps (if removed), then the handle.
6-28
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Push down to flex handle
and flatten against cabinet;
then pull it out.
Handle Cap
removal
Handle removal
Flip Stand
removal
Foot removal
Figure 6-11: Cabinet modules removal
6-29
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Procedures for OuterĆChassis Modules
You should have completed the Access Procedure before doing any procedure in
this collection. This section describes removal/installation procedures for the
following modules:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Fan
Floppy Disk
PS100 Low Voltage Power Supply
A10/A11 Connector Board
A60 Memory Board
A75 Noise Generator Board
A71 (AWG510)/A72 (AWG520)
Output Board
H
H
H
A40 Clock Board
A50 AWG Board
Rear Chassis
Fan
1. Assemble equipment and locate module to be removed: Have handy a
screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Items 1 and 3). Locate the fan on the
locator diagram Outer-Chassis Modules, Figure 6–3, page 6–14.
2. Orient the waveform generator : Set the generator so its bottom is down on
the work surface and its left side is facing you.
3. Disconnect the fan from the Connector board: Unplug three fans’ power
cables from J910, J911, and J912.
4. Remove the fan: Remove the four screws securing the fan bracket to the
main chassis, and lift the fans away from the chassis. When removing each
fan, remove the four screws securing the fan to the bracket, and lift it away
from the bracket.
5. Reinstallation: Do in reverse order substeps 3 and 4, reversing the removal
instructions in each substep to reinstall the assembly. Refer to the procedure
Cabinet (page 6–20) to complete reassembly of the generator.
6-30
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
J932
J931
J930
A10/A11 Connector Board
Figure 6-12: Fan removal
Floppy Disk
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:
a. Have handy a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Items 1 and 3), and
if removing the disk drive main body, Phillips #1 head (Items 2).
b. Locate the modules to be removed, including those listed under
Additional Modules Removed in the locator diagram Outer-Chassis
Modules, Figure 6–3, page 6–14.
c. Do the procedure Trim Ring, Menu Buttons, and Output Panel (page
6–23).
2. Orient the waveform generator: Set the generator so its top is down on the
work surface and its left side is facing you.
6-31
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
3. Remove the Floppy Disk Drive: Use Figure 6–13 as a guide.
a. Unplug the J124 floppy driver connector (ribbon interconnect cable) that
connects the disk drive to the A10/A11 Connector board.
b. Use the screwdriver with Phillips #2 tip to remove the two screws
securing the floppy disk bracket to the main chassis, and lift it away
from the chassis. When removing the disk drive main body, use the
screwdriver with Phillips #1 tip to remove the two screws securing the
drive to the bracket, then pull out the disk drive.
J124
Figure 6-13: Floppy Disk removal
4. Reinstallation: Do, in reverse order, substeps 3b then 3a to reinstall the
floppy disk drive. Then refer to the procedure Cabinet (page 6–20) to
complete reassembly of the generator:
PS100 Low Voltage Power
Supply
1. Assemble equipment and locate module to be removed: Have handy a
screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Items 1 and 3). Locate the fan in the
locator diagram Outer-Chassis Modules, Figure 6–3, page 6–14.
2. Orient the waveform generator: Set the generator so its bottom is down on
the work surface and its right side is facing you.
6-32
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
3. Remove the low–voltage power supply:
a. Unplug three power cables from J1, J2, and J3 (on the A10/A11
Connector board). See Figure 6–14.
b. Remove the two screws from the rear of the generator that mount the
low-voltage power supply to the rear chassis.
c. Remove the four screws from the top of the generator that mount the
supply to the main chassis. Then remove the screw securing the ground
lead to the main chassis.
d. Lift the module up out of the generator to complete removal.
J3
J2
J1
Figure 6-14: Power supply module removal
6-33
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
4. Reinstallation: Do, in reverse order, substeps 3a through 3d to reinstall the
low–voltage power supply. Then refer to the procedure Cabinet (page 6–20)
to complete reassembly of the generator:
A10/A11 Connector Board
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed: Have handy a
screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Items 1 and 3). Find the modules to
be removed in the locator diagram Outer-Chassis Modules, Figure 6–3,
page 6–14.
2. Orient the waveform generator: Set the generator so its bottom is down on
the work surface and its front is facing you.
3. Remove the A10/A11 Connector Board:
a. Disconnect these cables and connectors. See Figure 6–15 as a guide.
H
H
H
H
Three fan’s power cables at J930, J931, and J932.
The cable from the low–voltage power supply at J3.
The interconnect cables from CPU board at J110, J112, and J113.
The interconnect cables to the Monitor Out at J127 and the A90 Key
board at J128.
H
H
H
H
The interconnect cable from the A30 GPIB board at J115.
The interconnect cable from the Back Plane at J122.
The cables from the A20 Front Panel board at J121.
J125 video signal connector and J124 floppy driver connector.
b. Using a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip, remove the five screws
attaching the A10/A11 Connector board to the chassis.
c. Lift the board up and away from the chassis to complete the removal.
4. Reinstallation: Do, in reverse order, substeps 3a through 3c reversing each
step to reinstall the A10/A11 Connector board. Then refer to the procedure
Cabinet (page 6–20) to complete reassembly of the generator:
6-34
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Fuses
J3
Fan power connectors
J930, J931, J932
J110
J125
J128
J127
J124
J112
J113
To J128
To J127
J122
J115
J121
To J110
To J125
To J3
To J124
To J910,
J911, J912
To J113
To J112
To J122
To J115
To J121
Figure 6-15: A10/A11 Connector board removal
A60 Memory Board
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed: Have an angled–tip
tweezers (Item 10) handy. Find the modules to be removed in the locator
diagram Outer-Chassis Modules, Figure 6–3, page 6–14.
2. Orient the waveform generator: Set the generator so its top is down on the
work surface and its right side is facing you.
6-35
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
3. Remove the A60 Memory Board.
a. Release the retainer latches securing the memory boards to the A50
AWG board. See Figure 6–16. Using the tweezers, pinch the tab of the
retainer out of the hole of the memory board. Then, insert the tweezers’
tip into the hole of the retainer to slide it out.
b. Open the lever on one side of the connector, and lift out the memory
board.
c. Repeat 3a and 3b to remove the other memory boards.
Figure 6-16: A60 Memory Board removal
4. Reinstallation: Do substeps 3b then 3a reversing each step to reinstall each
memory board.
6-36
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
A75 Noise Generator
Board
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed: Have handy a
screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Items 1 and 3). Find the modules to
be removed in the locator diagram Outer-Chassis Modules, Figure 6–3,
page 6–14.
2. Orient the waveform generator: Set the generator so its top is down on the
work surface and its front is facing you.
3. Remove the A75 Noise Generator Board: Use Figure 6–17 as a guide.
a. Disconnect two coax cables at J197 and J198.
b. Remove the five screws attaching the A75 Noise Generator board to the
A71/A72 Output board.
c. Disconnect the Noise Generator board from the Output board, then lift it
up away to complete removal.
4. Reinstallation: Do, in reverse order, steps 3a through 3c reversing the
removal instructions of each step to reinstall the Noise Generator board.
A71 AWG510)/
A72 (AWG520)
Output Board
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:
a. Have handy a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Items 1 and 3).
b. Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram Outer-Chassis
Modules, Figure 6–3, page 6–14.
c. Do the procedure A75 Noise Generator Board that precedes this
procedure to remove the interconnect cables.
2. Orient the waveform generator: Set the generator so its top is down on the
work surface and its front is facing you.
3. Remove A71 (AWG510)/A72 (AWG520)
Output Board: Use Figure 6–17 as a guide.
a. Unplug these cables and connector:
H
The coax cables from ADD INPUT at J300, NOISE IN at J310,
CH 1 OUTPUT at J195, and CH 2 (AWG520)/CH 1 INVERT
(AWG520) OUTPUT at J295.
H
H
The interconnect cables from the A50 AWG board at J100, J102,
J200, and J202.
The cable connector from the A50 AWG board at J700.
b. Remove the four screws attaching the Output board to the main chassis.
c. Lift the Output board up away from the main chassis to complete the
removal.
6-37
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Noise Generator
board
J198
J197
J100
J102
J202
J200
J300
J195
J700
J310
Outrput board
J295
Figure 6-17: A75 Noise Generator Board and A71 (AWG510)/A72 (AWG520)
Output Board removal
4. Reinstallation: Do, in reverse order, steps 3a through 3c reversing the
removal instructions of each step to reinstall the Output board. Then refer to
the procedure A75 Noise Generator Board (page 6–37) and Cabinet (page
6–20) to complete the reassembly.
6-38
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
A40 Clock Board
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed: Have handy a
screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Items 1 and 3). Find the modules to
be removed in the locator diagram Outer-Chassis Modules, Figure 6–3,
page 6–3.
2. Orient the waveform generator: Set the generator so its top is down on the
work surface and its rear is facing you.
3. Remove the A40 Clock Board.: Use Figure 6–18 as a guide.
a. Unplug two interconnect cables at J41, J200, and J340 on the A40 Clock
board.
b. Remove the four screws attaching the Clock board to the AWG board.
c. Disconnect the Clock board from the AWG board, then lift it up away to
complete the removal.
Clock board
J41
J340
J200
Figure 6-18: A40 Clock Board removal
4. Reinstallation: Do, in reverse order, steps 3a through 3c reversing the
removal instructions of each step to reinstall the Clock board.
6-39
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
A50 AWG Board
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:
a. Have handy a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Items 1 and 3).
b. Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram Outer-Chassis
Modules, Figure 6–3, page 6–14.
c. Do the procedure A71 (AWG510)/A72 (AWG520)
Output Board that precedes this procedure to remove the Output board.
2. Orient the waveform generator: Set the generator so its left side is down on
the work surface and its rear is facing you.
3. Remove the A50 AWG Board.: Use Figure 6–19 as a guide while doing the
following substeps.
a. Unplug these cables and connectors:
H
H
H
H
Two connectors J1 and J2 on the low–voltage power supply.
The cable from EVENT INPUT at J200 on the AWG Board.
The coax cable to CLOCK OUTPUT at J500 on the AWG Board.
The interconnect cable from J130 on the A30 GPIB board to J100 on
the AWG board at the cable junction. See also Figure 6–21, page
6–45.
b. Remove the twelve screws on top of the AWG board and two from the
rear panel.
c. Lift the AWG board up away from the main chassis to complete the
removal.
4. Reinstallation: Do, in reverse order, substeps 3b then 3a reversing each step
to reinstall the board. Then refer to the following procedures, in order listed,
to complete the reassembly.
H
H
A71 (AWG510)/A72 (AWG520)
Output Board
Cabinet (page 6–20).
6-40
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
On the Power Supply
To J1
J30
J31
To J2
To J130 on
the A30
GPIB board
J10
J11
J200
J500
J100
J130
To J700 on
the A71/A72
Output board
Figure 6-19: A50 AWG board removal
6-41
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Rear Chassis
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:
a. Have handy a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Items 1 and 3).
b. Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram Outer-Chassis
Modules, Figure 6–3, page 6–14.
c. Do the procedure PS100 Low Voltage Power Supply (page 6–32) to
remove the power supply module.
d. Do the procedure A40 Clock Board (page 6–39) to remove the intercon-
nect cables.
e. Do the procedure A50 AWG Board (page 6–40) to remove the AWG
board and the Output board.
f. Install the front cover (optional accessory) if it’s not already installed.
2. Orient the waveform generator: Set the generator so its bottom is down on
the work surface and its rear is facing you.
3. Remove the rear chassis: Use Figure 6–20 as a guide when doing the
following substeps:
a. Unplug these cables:
H
H
H
The GPIB interconnect cable at J110 on the A30 GPIB Board.
The LAN interconnect cable at the connector on the LAN interface.
The cable to DISPLAY MONITOR OUT at J127 and KEYBOARD
at J128 on the A10/A11 Connector board.
b. Remove the 5 screws securing the rear chassis to the main chassis.
6-42
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
IEEE STD 488 PORT
to J110
10 MHz REF IN to J340
TRIG IN to J200
10 BASE-T to
the LAN interface
KEYBOARD
to J128
EVENT IN
to J200
DISPLAY MONITOR OUT
to J127
NOISE OUT to J197
ADD IN to J300
CLOCK OUT to J500
Figure 6-20: Rear Chassis removal
4. Reinstallation: Do, in reverse order, substeps 3a–3b, reversing each step to
reinstall the rear chassis. Then see the following procedures, in the order
listed, to complete reassembly of the generator.
H
H
H
H
A50 AWG Board (page 6–40)
A40 Clock Board (page 6–39)
PS100 Low Voltage Power Supply (page 6–32)
Cabinet (page 6–20)
6-43
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Procedures for InnerĆChassis Modules
You should have completed the Access Procedure (page 6–16) before doing any
of the procedures for the Inner-Chassis modules. The procedures are presented in
the following order:
H
CPU Unit
H
H
H
H
H
CPU Board
Hard disk and Flash disk
LAN Board
A30 GPIB Board
Back Plane Board
H
H
Display Assembly and Supply Fuse
Front Subpanel
CPU Unit
This procedure describes how to remove these circuit boards contained in the
CPU unit:
H
H
H
H
H
CPU Board
Hard disk and Flash disk
LAN Board
A30 GPIB Board
Back Plane
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:
a. Have handy a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Items 1 and 3).
b. Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram, Internal
Modules, in Figure 6–4, page 6–15.
c. Do the procedure A10/A11 Connector Board (page 6–39) to remove the
interconnect cables to the CPU board and the A30 GPIB board. It is not
necessary to pull the Connector board out.
2. Orient the waveform generator: Set the generator so its bottom is down on
the work surface and the right side facing you.
6-44
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
3. Remove the CPU Unit: Use Figure 6–21 as a guide while doing the
following substeps.
a. Unplug the GPIB interconnect cable at J110 on the A30 GPIB board and
and the LAN interconnect cable of the LAN interface board.
b. Unplug the interconnect cable from J100 on A50 AWG board.
c. Remove the two screws on the bottom and another two from the right
side.
d. Lift the CPU Unit up away from the main chassis.
To J110 on the A30
GPIB board
To the LAN
interface board
From J100 on the
A50 AWG board
Figure 6-21: CPU Unit removal
6-45
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
4. Remove the CPU Board: Use Figure 6–22 as a guide while doing the
following steps:
a. Unplug the VGA and COM1 connectors on the left side of the CPU
board.
b. Unplug the interconnect cable from the flash disk.
c. Using a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip, remove the screw
securing the CPU board to the frame with a retainer on the the right side
of the unit.
d. Remove the screw on the left side of the CPU board.
e. Grasp the board and slide it out of the unit.
Backplane
CPU board
Hard disk &
Flash disk
LAN board
A30 GPIB board
Figure 6-22: CPU, HDD/Flash disk, LAN, and GPIB boards removal
6-46
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
5. Remove the Hard disk and Flash disk:
a. Using a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip, remove tha two screws
securing the hard disk and flash disk bracket to the frame on the the right
side of the CPU Unit. See Figure 6–22.
b. Remove the screw on the left side of the bracket.
c. Grasp the bracket and slide it out.
d. Using a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip, remove the three screws
securing the hard disk to the bracket. See Figure 6–23.
e. Remove the four screws securing the flash disk to the bracket.
Flash disk
Hard disk
Figure 6-23: Hard disk and flash disk removal
6-47
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
6. Remove the LAN Board:
a. Using a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip, remove the screw on the
left side of the LAN board. See Figure 6–22, page 6–45.
b. Grasp the board and slide it out.
7. Remove the A30 GPIB Board:
a. Using a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip, remove the screw on the
left side of the GPIB board. See Figure 6–22, page 6–45.
b. Grasp the board and slide it out.
8. Remove the Back Plane:
a. Using a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip, remove the four screws
securing the board to the frame. See Figure 6–22, page 6–45.
b. Grasp the board and slide it out.
9. Reinstallation:
a. Do, in reverse order, steps 4 through 8, reversing each step to reinstall all
boards in the CPU Unit.
b. Do, in reverse order, substeps 3a through 3c, reversing each step to
reinstall the CPU Unit.
c. Refer to the following procedures, in order, to complete reassembly of
the waveform generator.
H
H
A10/A11 Connector Board (cables only, page 6–34)
Cabinet (page 6–20)
6-48
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
NOTE. Only when the AWG500–Series is older than J320101 and the manufac-
ture’s type number of Hard Disk or Flash Disk exchanged is different from the
original. The following steps should be performed after that.
Preparation
1. ASCII 101 key or JIS 106 key keyboard. Before proceeding the procedures,
connect a keyboard to KEYBOARD connector (6–pin,mini–DIN) on the
AWG500–Series rear panel.
Initial Settings
1. While pressing the SW1 service switch on A10 connector board, turn on the
AWG500s power. To engaged the SW1 service switch, you must insert a
adjustment tool in the hole on the left side of the AWG.
2. At the boot process, the message Press <F2> to enter SETUP is displayed at
lower part of the display. According to the display message, press F2 key on
the keyboard to enter into BIOS setup mode.
3. Repeatedly press the arrow key to select ”IDE Adapter 0 Slave (D:xxxx
MB)” (when the Hard Disk is exchanged) or ”IDE Adapter 0 Master (
C:xxxx MB)” (when the Flash Disk is exchanged).
4. Press the ENTER key.
5. Highlight the line ”Autotype Fixed Disk [Press Enter]” and press ENTER
key to recognize the parameters of the exchanged disk.
6. Press the ESC key twice.
7. Press ENTER key at ”Save Changes and Exit”. The message box with
[Continue] selected appears.
8. Press ENTER key again to terminate the BIOS setup mode.
6-49
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Display Assembly and
Supply Fuse
NOTE. The display and the display-driver board are a single module and must be
removed and replaced as such. They are listed as a single module in the
Replaceable Parts List.
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed: Have handy a
screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Items 1 and 3). Locate the modules to
be removed in the locator diagram Inner-Chassis Modules, Figure 6–4, on
page 6–15.
2. Orient the waveform generator: Set the generator so its bottom is down on
the work surface and its rear is facing you.
3. Remove the high-voltage fuse: If you are servicing this fuse, remove the fuse
from its fuse holder. Reverse the procedure to reinstall.
WARNING. Display tube handling: Use care when handling a display tube. If you
break a display tube it may implode, scattering glass fragments with high
velocity and possibly injuring you. Wear protective clothing, including safety
glasses (preferably a full-face shield). Avoiding striking the display tube with or
against any object.
Display tube storage: Store the display tube face down in a protected location,
placing it on a soft, nonabrasive surface to prevent scratching the face plate.
4. Remove the display tube:
a. Take the precautions outlined in the warning above. See Figure 6–24
while doing the following substeps.
b. Unplug the display tube connector from the back of the display tube and
the display tube yoke connector from the display circuit board (J340).
Loosen the screw on the video board that holds the CRT sockets. Then
pull back on the video board slightly. This separates the board from the
socket.
c. Remove the two screws that secure the band circling the front of display
tube to the front subpanel. Carefully guide display tube forward to
partially remove it from the front subpanel and to access the anode lead
connected to the display tube.
6-50
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
WARNING. High-voltage is present on the anode lead. Before unplugging the
anode in the following substep, you must discharge it: ground a flat-bladed
screwdriver (Item 4) with an insulated handle to the chassis through a suitable
grounding strap. Next, probe under the insulating cap of the anode lead and
touch the lead’s metal conductor to discharge. Repeat. After unplugging the
anode in substep d, touch its metal conductor to the chassis for a few minutes to
further ensure discharge.
d. Discharge the anode lead as described in the immediately proceeding
WARNING, unplug it from the display tube, and discharge that lead
(again see WARNING).
e. Be sure you have read the WARNING on display tube handling and
storage found at the start of this display tube removal procedure. Then
pull the display tube out through the front subpanel to complete removal.
Store as directed in the previous WARNING message.
J340
Figure 6-24: Display assembly removal
6-51
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
5. Remove the display supply board: Use Figure 6–25 as a guide.
CAUTION. If any RTV Silicon is removed from the generator, it must be replaced
in order to maintain the warranted characteristics for random vibration.
a. Remove the six screws that mount the display-driver board to the main
chassis.
b. Grasp the display driver board. Work from the front and top to tilt the
board so its right edge is up and its left side is down and lift it out of the
top of the generator’s main chassis.
Move circuit board
forward to clear
main chassis.
Figure 6-25: Display Driver Board removal
6-52
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
6. Reinstallation:
a. Do, in reverse order, substeps 5a–5b, reversing each step to reinstall
Display-Driver board.
b. Do, in reverse order, substeps 4a–4e, reversing each step to reinstall the
display tube if removed.
c. See step 3 to reinstall the supply fuse if it was removed.
d. See the following procedures, in order, to complete reassembly of the
waveform generator:
H
H
H
H
A10/A11 Connector Board (page 6–34)
Display-Frame Assembly
Trim Ring, Menu Buttons, and Output Panel (page 6–23)
Cabinet (page 6–20) (completes reassembly)
Front Subpanel
1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:
a. Have handy a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Items 1 and 3).
b. Do the procedure Display Assembly and Supply Fuse (page 6–50). Do
not remove the display-driver board.
c. Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram Inner-Chassis
Modules, Figure 6–3, page 6–14.
2. Orient the waveform generator: Set the generator so its rear is down on the
work surface and its bottom is facing you.
3. Remove the front subpanel: Remove the six screws securing the front
subpanel to the main chassis. (See Figure 6–26 for screw locations.) Lift the
front subpanel up away from the main chassis to complete the removal.
4. Reinstallation: Do the following substeps to reinstall the front subpanel and
reassemble the remainder of the generator:
a. Align the front subpanel to the main chassis, taking care to ensure that
the main chassis slips into its alignment slot on the front subpanel (see
magnified view, Figure 6–26.) Then reinstall the six screws removed in
step 3.
b. See the procedure Display Assembly and Supply Fuse (page 6–50) to
reinstall the display-frame assembly and display tube.
6-53
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Figure 6-26: Front Subpanel Removal
c. See the following procedures, in the order listed, for instructions for
reinstalling the remaining modules.
H
H
H
H
A10/A11 Connector Board (page 6–34)
Display-Frame Assembly
Trim Ring, Menu Buttons, and Output Panel (page 6–23)
Cabinet (page 6–20)
6-54
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
This subsection contains information and procedures designed to help you isolate
faulty modules in the waveform generator. If a module needs to be replaced,
follow the Removal and Installation Procedures located in this section.
This subsection consists of the following flowcharts:
H
H
H
H
H
Figure 6–27: Primary Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 6–28: Troubleshooting Procedure 1 — Power Supply Module
Figure 6–30: Troubleshooting Procedure 2 — CPU or Front-panel Module
Figure 6–32: Troubleshooting Procedure 3 — Monitor Module
Figure 6–37: Troubleshooting Procedure 4 — Module Isolation
Diagnostics
The waveform generator has two levels of internal diagnostics that focus on
verifying, adjusting, and if need be, isolating faulty modules.
Both levels of internal diagnostics report any bad modules and/or interfaces. If a
bad module and/or interface is found, use the troubleshooting procedures in this
section to determine which module needs to be replaced.
The two levels of diagnostics are the short confidence set and the extended set
that tests the oscilloscope circuitry in depth and takes more time. At power on,
the waveform generator automatically executes the short set. The extended set is
optional and is executed by using the following procedure:
Prerequisites: Power on the waveform generator and allow a 20 minute warm-up
before doing this procedure.
1. Display the diagnostics menu: Press UTILITY ! Diag.
2. Select the menu: Select ALL using the general purpose knob.
3. Run the diagnostics: Press Execute Diagnostic.
4. Wait: The internal diagnostics do an exhaustive verification of proper
oscilloscope function. This verification will take several minutes. When
finished, the waveform generator will display a report of any bad modules
and/or interfaces.
6-55
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Press the PRINCIPAL POWER
SWITCH on the rear panel, and then
press the ON/STBY button on the
front panel of the generator
Power off and remove the cover using
the Rear Cover and Cabinet removal
procedure. Check all the cables coming
out of the power supply module and the
cabling between modules. Be sure
every cable is attached securely.
Can you
hear the fan
whirling?
Disconnect the fun cable
and power on.
No
Yes
Is
the voltage on
A10/A11 board
TP100 : +5 V
TP101 : +12 V
TP103 : -4.6 V
?
Perform the power supply module
troubleshooting procedure 2
(page 6-57).
No
With the
Perform the front panel
generator power on,
do the front panel lights
come on and then go
off later?
No
module troubleshooting
procedure 2
(page 6-59).
Yes
Replace the Fun
(page 6-30).
Yes
Power off the generator
and remove the cabinet
using the Rear Cover
and Cabinet removal
procedure.
Perform the monitor
module troubleshooting
procedure 3
Does the
display seem
to be working
at all?
No
(page 6-61).
Yes
Does the
generator respond
correctly when the
front panel buttons
are pushed?
Perform the CPU module
troubleshooting procedure 2
(page 6-59).
No
Yes
Does
Perform the module isolation
troubleshooting procedure 4
(page 6-64).
the generator power
on and pass all the
diagnostics?
No
Done.
Figure 6-27: Primary troubleshooting procedure
6-56
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Is
Use this procedure to
troubleshoot the power
supply module.
the principal power
switch in the on
position?
No
Turn on the principal
power switch.
Yes
Is
Turn off the principal power
switch. Replace the fuse. Turn
on the principal power switch.
Does
the fuse blow
again?
No
Yes
line fuse
ok?
Yes
No
Power off and remove the cover using
the Cabinet removal procedure. Check
all the cables coming out of the power
supply module and the cabling
between modules. Be sure every cable
is attached securely.
Turn on
the principal power
switch. Can you hear the
tick of relay actuator in
the power supply
No
module?
Yes
Are the
Turn off the principal power switch.
Remove the generator cabinet using
the cabinet removal procedure. Check
the cables from the A10/A11 Connector
board. Disconect the cables at J1 and
J2 on the power supply module.
voltages on the
A10/A11 Connector board
TP100 : +5 V, TP101 : +12 V
TP102 : +24 V, TP103 : -4.6V
(see Figure 6-33 on
page 6-62)
Press
Yes
No
No
the ON/STBY button.
Does the generator
power on?
?
Check these power supply voltages
on J3 on the A10/A11 Connector board:
Yes
Press
Fix the power problem.
Yes
+5 V"3 %, -4.6 V"5 %,
the ON/STBY button.
Does the generator
power on?
+12 V"5 %, +24 V"5 %.
Check these power supply voltages
on J2 on the power supply module:
-2 V"20 %, -8 V"20 %, +8 V"20 %
(see Figure 6-29 for the power supply
connector pin assignment).
No
Connect
a jumper strap to
J30 on the A10/A11 (Manual
PON; see Figure 6-33 on
page 6-62). Does the
generator power
Yes
Replace the power
supply module
(page 6-32).
Are
No
the voltages
ok?
Yes
on?
The power supply module is ok.
Perform isolation troubleshooting for
the modules on the bottom of the
generator: A50 AWG board, A40 Clock
board, A71/72 Output board).
No
The power supply module is ok.
Perform isolation troubleshooting for
the A30 GPIB board and the A20
Front Panel board.
Figure 6-28: Troubleshooting procedure 1 Ċ Power Supply module
6-57
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
*Remote
On
-4.6 V
+24 V
*Power
Fail
+12 V
+5 V
9
1
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
J3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GND
Power Supply module
J3 on the A10/A11 Connector board
(See above for the pin assignment)
J2
J1
(See below for the
pin assignment)
+8 V
-8 V
+12 V
+5 V
-2 V
-4.6 V
14 13 12 11 10
9
2
8
1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
J1
J2
7
6
5
4
3
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
GND
*15V/8Vsel
NEVER connect the pin *15V/8Vsel to anywhere.
Always be open to avoid damage to the power
supply module.
Figure 6-29: Power Supply connectors
6-58
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Use this procedure to
determine if the CPU or the
frontĆpanel module is bad.
Turn on the PRINCIPAL POWER
SWITCH. on the rear panel, and
then turn on the ON/STBY button
on the front panel
Is there
Do
Power the generator off
and remove the cabinet,
then the power back on.
5 V between TP101
(GND) and TP100
(see Figure
all front panel LEDs
turn on and then turn
off later?
Yes
No
6-31)?
Yes
Fix the problem on
A10/A11 board.
No
Do
the Front Panel
buttons work
correctly?
No
Yes
Are all front
panel cables securely
installed in their sockets
and are the cables
ok?
No
Securely install and/ or replace
the front panel cables.
The front panel
module is ok.
Yes
Replace the CPU module.
Figure 6-30: Troubleshooting procedure 2 ĊCPU or Front Panel module
6-59
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
TP101 (GND)
TP100 (+5V)
A20 Front panel board
Figure 6-31: A20 Front Panel board
6-60
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
This procedure helps you
determine whether the monitor
module is bad.
Do pins 7
Yes
Replace the monitor module
(page 6-50).
and 8 of J127 have
signals similar to
Figure 6-35?
Do the
No
Yes
horizontal and
/or vertical sync
lock ok?
Power the generator off and
disconnect the cable from J125 on
the A10/A11 Connector Board (see
Figure 6-33) then power back on.
No
Do pins
8 and 10 of J125
have signals similar
to Figure
6-35?
Power the AWG500 off and
disconnect the cable from J125 on
the A10/A11 Connector board (see
Figure 6-33) then power back on.
Yes
No
Does
pin 8 of J125
have a video signal with
the same levels as
in Figure
6-35?
Is
TP102 on the
A10/A11 Connector
Board at +24 V
?
Yes
Yes
Do pins
13 and 14 of the
VGA connector on the CPU
module (see Figure 6-34)
have signals
No
No
similar to Figure
6-35?
No
Replace the monitor module
(page 6-50).
Yes
Are
the cables securely
installed in their sockets
and are the cables
ok?
No
Replace the cable.
Does
J50 pin 7 on
the CPU board (see Figure
6-34) have a video
signal with the same levels
as in Figure
Replace the CPU module
(page 6-44).
No
Yes
Perform the power
supply module
troubleshooting
procedure 1
6-35?
Securely install
and/or replace
the cables.
Yes
(page 6-57).
Is the
No
problem
fixed?
Replace the cable.
Yes
Replace the CPU module
or the Backplane Board
(page 6-44).
Done.
Figure 6-32: Troubleshooting procedure 3 Ċ Monitor module
6-61
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
J30
J127
TP100
TP103
TP101
TP102
J125
A10/A11 Connector board
Figure 6-33: A10/A11 Connector board
VGA connector
on the CPU board
Figure 6-34: Location of the VGA connector
6-62
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
J127 pin 7 (horizontal sync)
31kHzrate
1
J127 pin 8 (vertical sync)
60Hzrate
2
Ch1
2.00V
M 20.0us
Ch2
Ch2
2.00V
1.60V
Figure 6-35: Horizontal and vertical sync signals
White level
TP112
Black level
Ch1
316mV
M 10.0us
200mV
Ch1
Figure 6-36: A video signal with white and black levels
6-63
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
This procedure assumes
that the waveform generator is
up and running and you can
read the display.
Select the extended diagnostics
Does the
display report
any errors?
Are any
failures
reported?
menu and run all the test suites (the
discussion of the Diagnostics on
page 6-55 explains how to do this).
No
No
The waveform generator is ok.
Yes
Yes
Diagnostics
Related module
System
CPU board (page 6-39)
A20 Front Panel board (page 6-39)
A30 GPIB board (page 6-39)
A10/A11 Connector board (page 6-34)
Run mode
A50 AWG board (page 6-40)
A30 GPIB board (page 6-39)
Clock
A40 Clock board (page 6-39)
Output
A71/72 Output board (page 6-37)
A50 AWG board (page 6-40)
Sequence Memory
Waveform Memory
A50 Memory board (page 6-40)
A60 Memory board (page 6-35)
A50 AWG board (page 6-40)
A30 GPIB board (page 6-39)
Can the
data be read or
written from/to
formatted floppy
disk?
Check all cables. Be sure every
cable is attached securely. Replace
the module indicated in the
Does the
display report
any errors?
Replace the floppyĆdisk
drive module
(page 6-31).
No
No
diagnostics. Run all diagnostics.
Yes
Yes
Done.
Figure 6-37: Troubleshooting procedure 4 Ċ Module isolation
6-64
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages and Codes
Table 6–5 lists instrument error codes and their meaning.
Table 6-5: Device errors
Error code
1101
1102
1103
1111
Error message
CH1 internal offset
CH1 output offset
CH1 gain
CH1 x3dB attenuator
CH1 x6dB attenuator
CH1 x12dB attenuator
CH1 x20dB attenuator
CH1 10MHz filter
1112
1113
1114
1121
1122
1123
1124
1201
1202
1203
1211
1212
1213
1214
1221
1222
1223
1224
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
CH1 20MHz filter
CH1 50MHz filter
CH1 100MHz filter
CH2 internal offset
CH2 output offset
CH2 gain
CH2 x3dB attenuator
CH2 x6dB attenuator
CH2 x12dB attenuator
CH2 x20dB attenuator
CH2 10MHz filter
CH2 20MHz filter
CH2 50MHz filter
CH2 100MHz filter
System failure
Real-time clock power
Configuration record and checksum status
Incorrect configuration
Memory size miscompare
Fixed-disk drive initialization status
6-65
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages and Codes
Table 6-5: Device errors (cont.)
Error code
2106
Error message
Time status
2110
Front panel failure
2111
Front panel configuration
Front panel communication
Front panel RAM
2112
2113
2114
Front panel ROM
2115
Front panel A/D
2116
Front panel timer
2301
A30 board failure
2401
Clock delay data not found
Clock delay data checksum
Calibration data failure
2402
2700
2701
Calibration data not found
Calibration data checksum
Control1 register failure
Control1 register bit0 to bit3
Event table data bus failure
Event table data bus bit0 to bit15
Event table address bus failure
Event table address bus bit0 to bit23
Event table memory chip select failure
Event table memory chip select 0
Event table memory chip select 1
Event table memory chip cell failure
Event table memory chip 0
Event table memory chip 1
A40 board failure
2702
3100
3101 to 3104
3200
3201 to 3216
3250
3251 to 3274
3300
3301
3302
3350
3351
3352
4100
4101
PLL 500MHz locked
4102
PLL 600MHz unlocked
4103
PLL 1350MHz unlocked
PLL 1500MHz locked
4104
5100
Sequence memory data bus failure
Sequence memory data bus bit0 to bit15
5101 to 5116
6-66
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages and Codes
Table 6-5: Device errors (cont.)
Error code
5150
Error message
Sequence memory address bus failure
Sequence memory address bus bit0 to bit23
Sequence memory chipselect failure
Sequence memory chipselect 0 to select 5
Sequence memory chipcell failure
5151 to 5174
5200
5201 to 5206
5250
5251 to 5256
5300
Sequence memory chip0 to chip5
CH1 Waveform memory data bus failure
CH1 Waveform memory data bus bit0 to bit15
CH1 Waveform memory address bus failure
5301 to 5316
5350
5351 to 5374
5400
CH1 Waveform memory address bus bit0 to bit23
CH1 Waveform memory chipselect failure
CH1 Waveform memory chipselect 0 to select 48
CH1 Waveform memory chipcell failure
CH1 Waveform memory chip0 to chip48
CH2 or CH1 Waveform memory data bus failure
CH2 or CH1 Waveform memory data bus bit0 to bit15
CH2 or CH1 Waveform memory address bus failure
CH2 or CH1 Waveform memory address bus bit0 to bit23
CH2 or CH1 Waveform memory chipselect failure
CH2 or CH1 Waveform memory chipselect 0 to select 47
CH2 or CH1 Waveform memory chipcell failure
CH2 or CH1 Waveform memory chip0 to chip47
CH1 Arb D/A failure
5401 to 5449
5500
5501 to 5549
5600
5601 to 5616
5650
5651 to 5674
5700
5701 to 5748
5800
5801 to 5848
5900
5901 to 5912
5950
CH1 Arb D/A data bit0 to bit11
CH2 Arb D/A failure
5951 to 5962
7110
CH2 Arb D/A data bit0 to bit11
CH1 output offset failure
7111
CH1 output offset
7120
CH1 internal offset failure
7121
CH1 internal offset
7130
CH1 Arb gain failure
7131
CH1 Arb gain
7140
CH1 attenuator failure
6-67
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages and Codes
Table 6-5: Device errors (cont.)
Error code
7141
7142
7143
7144
7150
7151
7152
7153
7150
7170
7171
7210
7211
7220
7221
7230
7231
7240
7241
7242
7243
7244
7250
7251
7252
7253
7254
7270
7271
Error message
CH1 3dB attenuator
CH1 6dB attenuator
CH1 12dB attenuator
CH1 20dB attenuator
CH1 filter failure
CH1 10MHzfilter
CH1 20MHzfilter
CH1 50MHzfilter
CH1 100MHzfilter
CH1 output key failure
CH1 output key
CH2 or CH1 output offset failure
CH2 or CH1 output offset
CH2 or CH1 internal offset failure
CH2 or CH1 internal offset
CH2 or CH1 Arb gain failure
CH2 or CH1 Arb gain
CH2 or CH1 attenuator failure
CH2 or CH1 3dB attenuator
CH2 or CH1 6dB attenuator
CH2 or CH1 12dB attenuator
CH2 or CH1 20dB attenuator
CH2 or CH1 filter failure
CH2 or CH1 10MHzfilter
CH2 or CH1 20MHzfilter
CH2 or CH1 50MHzfilter
CH2 or CH1 100MHzfilter
CH2 or CH1 output key failure
CH2 or CH1 output key
6-68
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Options and Accessories
This appendix describes the various options as well as the standard and optional
accessories that are available for the AWG510 and AWG520 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator.
Options
Tektronix will ship the options shown in Table 7–1:
Table 7-1: Options
Option
ąą
Label
Description
A1
Universal European
power cord
220 V, 50 Hz power cord
Fuse 5A (T) (IEC 127)
Fuse Cap
Cable Retainer
A2
A3
UK power cord
240 V, 50 Hz power cord
Fuse 5A (T) (IEC 127)
Fuse Cap
Cable Retainer
Australian power cord
240 V, 50 Hz power cord
Fuse 5A (T) (IEC 127)
Fuse Cap
Cable Retainer
A4
A5
North American power
cord
240 V, 60 Hz power cord
Cable Retainer
Switzerland power cord
Digital data out
220 V, 50 Hz power cord
Fuse 5A (T) (IEC 127)
Fuse Cap
Cable Retainer
03
Outputs digital data from the waveform memory directly to the
DIGITAL DATA OUT connectors on the rear panel without
passing through the D/A converter.
7-1
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Options
Table 7-1: Options (cont.)
Option
ąą
Label
Description
1R
Rackmount
Waveform generator comes configured for installation in a
19Ćinch wide instrument rack. For later field conversions, order
kit # 016Ć1675ĆXX.
1S
WaveWriter S3FTx00
WaveWriter is a PC computer application used to create
waveforms for advanced signal generating and processing
instruments. Many Tektronix instruments, such as arbitrary
waveform generators and oscilloscopes with the saveĆonĆdelta"
feature, are enhanced by this program. WaveWriter helps users
configure waveforms with a minimum of effort.
With the WaveWriter package, you can create new waveforms or
edit waveforms acquired from various instrument sources.
WaveWriter gives you interactive control of the waveform
generating process. WaveWriter operates within the Microsoft
TM
Windows environment.
10
78ĂMByteĂFlashĂDisk
AĂ78ĂMbyteĂflashĂdiskĂaddition.ĂTheĂhardĂdiskĂisĂdeletedĂwhen
Ăthis optionĂisĂordered.
The AWG500 retains the state of the front panel ON/STB
switch. The ON/STB switch must be left in the on position to be
able to power on and power off the instrument using the principal
power switch.
NOTE:ĂIf the ON/STB switch is left in the off position, you will not
be able to power on/off the instrument using the principal power
switch or an external power switch unit.
D1
Certificate with CalibraĆ
tion Data
A Certificate of Traceable Calibration is provided when this
option is specified.
7-2
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Options
Standard Accessories
The waveform generator comes standard with the accessories listed in Table 7–2.
Table 7-2: Standard Accessories
Accessory
Part number
071Ć0099Ć50
070ĆA810Ć50
063Ć2981ĆXX
063Ć2982ĆXX
063Ć2983ĆXX
159Ć0407Ć00
200Ć2264Ć00
161Ć0230Ć01
User Manual
Programmer Manual
Sample waveform floppy disk, 3.5 inch
GPIB sample program floppy disk, 3.5 inch
Performance check/adjustment floppy disk, 3.5 inch
Fuse, 10 A FAST (UL198G, 3 AG) (installed)
Fuse cap (installed)
U.S. Power Cord
Optional Accessories
You can also order the optional accessories listed in Table 7–3.
Table 7-3: Optional Accessories
Accessory
Part number
Service Manual
071Ć0101Ć50
200Ć3696Ć01
016Ć1675ĆXX
012Ć0991Ć00
012Ć1342Ć00
012Ć1256Ć00
012Ć1458Ć00
012Ć1459Ć00
011Ć0049Ć02
015Ć0660Ć00
015Ć0659Ć00
015Ć0658Ć00
015Ć0657Ć00
Front cover
Rack Mount Kit (for field conversion)
GPIB cable, 2 m
BNC cable, 50 W
BNC cable, 50 W, doubleĆshield
SMB cable, 50 W
SMBĆtoĆBNC cable, 50 W
BNC terminator, 50 W
BNC power divider, 50 W, DC to 300 MHz, VSWR: 1.2 max.
BNC low pass filter, 400 MHz
BNC low pass filter, 200 MHz
BNC low pass filter, 100 MHz
7-3
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Options
Accessory Software
The optional accessories listed in Table 7–4 are Tektronix software products
recommended for use with your waveform generator.
Table 7-4: Accessory Software
Software
Part Number
WaveWriter: AWG and waveform creation editor
S3FTx00
7-4
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electrical Parts List
The modules that make up this instrument are a combination of mechanical and
electrical subparts. Therefore, all replaceable modules are listed in section 10,
Mechanical Parts List. Refer to that section for part numbers when using this
manual.
8-1
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electrical Parts List
8-2
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagrams
This section contains following diagrams:
H
H
Block Diagram for the AWG510 and AWG520 with Options 03
Interconnect Diagram for the AWG510 and AWG520 with Option 03
Block diagrams show the modules and functional blocks in the waveform
generator. Interconnect diagrams show how the modules in the waveform
generator connect together.
9-1
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagrams
9-2
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
!0 MHz Reference Clock
Trigger
Marker Output
TCXO
DDS
A40 Clock
Digital Data Out (Option 3)
Clock Output
External Clock (from J320101)
PLL OSC
Bus
Clock
A70
Analog Output
A50
AWG
A75
Noise
Generator
Clock Divider
CH1
1GHz DAC
A60
Waveform Memory
Shift Register
SEQ circuit
CH1
Analog Signal
Event Input
CH1
1GHz DAC
A60
Waveform Memory
Shift Register
Filter
AMP
Attenuator
SEQ memory
CH2 (AWG520)
/CH1 (AWG510)
(Op.03, AWG520)
Calibration
Offset
A30 GPIB Board
GPIB Connector
LAN Connector
CPU unit
Control Signal
Ethernet LAN Interface
+5 V
A10/A11
Connector
-4.6 V
-2 V
+8 V
-8 V
+12 V
FDD
CPU
MISC
ISA
Bus
VGA
SIMM 64MB
COM1
A20 Front Panel
Fan Control
Fan
Bezel Switch
Flash disk
Back
Plane
Fan
Control
FDD
3 GB
hard disk
Power Supply
+5 V, +12 V
+5 V, -4.6 V, +12 V, +24 V
A90 Key Board
Figure 9-1: Block diagram
9-3
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-4
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
W300
W670
ADD INPUT
A75
Noise Generator
J300
NOISE OUTPUT
J197 J198
J340
J200
W340
W200
REF. CLOCK INPUT
TRIGGER OUTPUT
J310
J41
A40
Clock Board
J042
W042
EXT CLOCK
(from J320101)
J40
A70
Analog Output
W410
W701
W702
J120
CH1
J130
W700
J6110, J6130
(J7110, J7130)
MARKER OUT
A60
Memory
J41
J6010
J6011
J7010
J6011
J9000
J8000-J8230
CH1
DIGITAL DATA OUT (OPTION 03) D0-D9
CLOCK OUTPUT
J600, J610, J620,
J700, J710,, J720
CH2 (AWG520)
/CH1 (AWG510)
J100
J102
J200
J202
A50
AWG Board
J500
A60
(CH2)
CH2
J1100, J1110, J1120,
J1200, J1210, J1220
EVENT INPUT
W520
J200
J10/J11 J30/J31
J100 W510
W130
J130
A30
GPIB Board
J110
W170
W125
Slot4
Slot3
GPIB Connector
CRT Module
J120
J115
LAN
Conn
LAN Interface
W10
J125
J920
W2
W1
J113
FDD
W113
W112
CPU Board
A20
Front Panel Board
J121
J127
J124
W121
W127
MISC
J112
Slot1
VGA
W110
J110
Monitor Out
COM1
IDE
J910
J911
J912
Fan
Fan
Fan
W124
Floppy disk drive
W114
Flash disk
Hard disk
Back
Plane
A90
Key Board
J128
W128
J2
J1
A10/A11
Connector
Board
PS100
Power Supply
J122
J3
J3
Figure 9-2: Interconnections
9-5
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-6
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
This section contains a list of the replaceable modules for the AWG510 and
AWG520. Use this list to identify and order replacement parts.
Parts Ordering Information
Replacement parts are available through your local Tektronix field office or
representative.
Changes to Tektronix instruments are sometimes made to accommodate
improved components as they become available and to give you the benefit of
the latest circuit improvements. Therefore, when ordering parts, it is important to
include the following information in your order.
H
H
H
H
Part number
Instrument type or model number
Instrument serial number
Instrument modification number, if applicable
If you order a part that has been replaced with a different or improved part, your
local Tektronix field office or representative will contact you concerning any
change in part number.
Change information, if any, is located at the rear of this manual.
Part Number Revision
Level
Tektronix part numbers contain two digits that show the revision level of the
part. For most parts in this manual, you will find the letters XX in place of the
revision level number.
Part Number Revision Level
Revision Level may show as XX
670Ć7918Ć03
670Ć7918ĆXX
When you order parts, Tektronix will provide you with the most current part for
your product type, serial number, and modification (if applicable). At the time of
your order, Tektronix will determine the part number revision level needed for
your product, based on the information you provide.
10-1
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Module Servicing
Modules can be serviced by selecting one of the following three options. Contact
your local Tektronix service center or representative for repair assistance.
Module Exchange. In some cases you may exchange your module for a reman-
ufactured module. These modules cost significantly less than new modules and
meet the same factory specifications. For more information about the module
exchange program, call 1-800-TEK-WIDE, extension 6630.
Module Repair and Return. You may ship your module to us for repair, after which
we will return it to you.
New Modules. You may purchase replacement modules in the same way as other
replacement parts.
Using the Replaceable Parts List
This section contains a list of the mechanical and/or electrical components that
are replaceable for the generator. Use this list to identify and order replacement
parts. The following table describes each column in the parts list.
Parts List Column Descriptions
Column Column Name
Description
1
Figure & Index Number
Tektronix Part Number
Serial Number
Items in this section are referenced by component number.
Use this part number when ordering replacement parts from Tektronix.
2
3 and 4
Column three indicates the serial number at which the part was first effective. Column four
indicates the serial number at which the part was discontinued. No entries indicates the part is
good for all serial numbers.
5
6
Qty
This indicates the quantity of parts used.
Name & Description
An item name is separated from the description by a colon (:). Because of space limitations, an
item name may sometimes appear as incomplete. Use the U.S. Federal Catalog handbook
H6Ć1 for further item name identification.
7
8
Mfr. Code
This indicates the code of the actual manufacturer of the part. (Code to name and address cross
reference is located after this page.)
Mfr. Part Number
This indicates the actual manufacturer's or vendor's part number.
Abbreviations
Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1.1–1972.
Mfr. Code to Manufacturer
Cross Index
The following table cross indexes codes, names, and addresses of manufacturers
or vendors of components listed in the parts list.
10-2
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Manufacturers Cross Index
Mfr.
Code
Manufacturer
Address
City, State, Zip Code
S3109
FELLER
72 VERONICA AVE
UNIT 4
SUMMERSET NJ 08873
TK0392
TK0435
TK1163
TK1287
NORTHWEST FASTENER SALES INC
LEWIS SCREW CO
8058 SW NIMBUS AVENUE
4300 S RACINE AVE
BEAVERTON OR 97008
CHICAGO IL 60609-3320
TIGARD OR 97223
POLYCAST INC
9898 SW TIGARD ST
ENOCH MFG CO
14242 SE 82ND DR
PO BOX 98
CLACKAMAS OR 97015
TK1908
TK1918
TK2058
TK2432
TK2548
PLASTIC MOLDED PRODUCTS
SHIN-ETSU POLYMER AMERICA INC
TDK CORPORATION OF AMERICA
UNION ELECTRIC
4336 SO ADAMS
TACOMA WA 98409
1181 NORTH 4TH ST
SAN JOSE CA 95112
1600 FEEHANVILLE DRIVE
15/F #1, FU-SHING N. ROAD
14181 SW MILLIKAN WAY
MOUNT PROSPECT, IL 60056
TAIPEI, TAIWAN ROC
BEAVERTON OR 97077
XEROX BUSINESS SERVICES
DIV OF XEROX CORPORATION
0JR05
0KB01
00779
TRIQUEST CORP3000 LEWIS AND CLARK HWY
VANCOUVER WA 98661-2999
STAUFFER SUPPLY
AMPINC
810 SE SHERMAN
PORTLAND OR 97214
HARRISBURG PA 17105
2800 FULLING MILL
PO BOX 3608
07416
NELSON NAME PLATE CO
BELDEN CORPORATION
3191 CASITAS
LOS ANGELES CA 90039-2410
RICHMOND IN 47375-0010
2W733
2200 US HIGHWAY 27 SOUTH
PO BOX 1980
24931
6D224
61058
SPECIALTY CONNECTOR CO INC
2100 EARLYWOOD DR
PO BOX 547
FRANKLIN IN 46131
GARDENA, CA 90248
SECAUCUS NJ 07094
HARBOR TRI-TEC
A BERG ELECTRONICS COMPANY
14500 SOUTH BROADWAY
MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC CORPOF AMERICA
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL CO DIV
TWO PANASONIC WAY
61857
61935
64537
73743
75915
SAN-0 INDUSTRIAL CORP91-3 COLIN DRIVE
SCHURTER INC
HOLBROOK NY 11741
1016 CLEGG COURT
60 S JEFFERSON ROAD
111 INDUSTRIAL RD
PETALUMA CA 94952-1152
WHIPPANY, NJ 07981
KDI/TRIANGLE ELECTRONICS
FISCHER SPECIAL MFG CO
COLD SPRING KY 41076-9749
DES PLAINES IL 60016-3049
LITTELFUSE TRACOR INC
SUB OF TRACOR INC
800 E NORTHWEST HWY
78189
80009
ILLINOIS TOOL WORKS INC
SHAKEPROOF DIV
ST CHARLES ROAD
ELGIN IL 60120
TEKTRONIX INC
14150 SW KARL BRAUN DR
PO BOX 500
BEAVERTON OR 97077-0001
86928
98291
SEASTROM MFG CO INC
701 SONORA AVE
40 LINDEMAN DR
GLENDALE CA 91201-2431
TURNBULL CT 06611-4739
SEALECTRO CORP
BICC ELECTRONICS
10-3
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List
Fig. &
TektronixPart Serial No. Serial No.
Mfr.
Index
Number
Effective
Discont'd
Code
Qty Name & Description
Mfr.PartNumber
3901183XX
Number
1-1
-2
390-1183-00
348-1115-00
212-0210-00
1
2
6
CABINET,ASSY:AWG500,AL
80009
80009
80009
FOOT,CABINET:SLATE GRAY,PLASTIC
3481115XX
-3
SCREW,MACHINE:M5X20MM L,PNH,STL,MFZN-C,
CROSS REC JIS B1111
ORDER BY DESC
-4
-5
159-0407-00
1
FUSE,CARTRIDGE:3AG,6A,250V,FAST BLOW
(AMERICAN)
80009
159040700
159-0210-00
200-2264-00
FUSE,CART:DIN 5 X 20MM,5AMP,250VSLOW
(EUROPEAN)
61857
61935
ET 5 AMP
1
1
CAP,FUSEHOLDER:3AG FUSES
(AMERICAN)
FEK 031.1666
200-2265-00
161-0230-01
334-9589-00
CAP,FUSEHOLDER:5 X 20MM FUSES
(EUROPEAN)
61935
FEK 031.1663
-6
-7
1
1
CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,18 AWG,92 L,SVT,TAN
(STANDARD ACCESSORY)
TK2432 ORDER BY DESC
MARKER,IDENT:MKD AWG510,POLYCARBONATE
80009
3349589XX
334-9590-00
101-0142-00
260-2715-00
1
1
1
MARKER,IDENT:MKD AWG520,POLYCARBONATE
TRIM,DECORATIVE:FRONT
80009
80009
80009
3349590XX
1010142XX
2602715XX
-8
-9
ACTUATOR:ELASTOMER MAT,FRONT PANEL,RUBBER
10-4
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
3
2
5
4
1
6
9
7
8
Figure 10-1: Cabinet
10-5
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List
Fig. &
TektronixPart Serial No. Serial No.
Mfr.
Index
Number
Effective
Discont'd
Code
Qty Name & Description
Mfr.PartNumber
3662114XX
3662111XX
3662170XX
3334264XX
1240469XX
3867047XX
3867047XX
3867047XX
3867047XX
3800927XX
3481159XX
3481160XX
Number
2-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
366-2114-00
366-2111-00
366-2170-00
333-4264-00
124-0469-00
386-7047-00
386-7047-01
386-7047-00
386-7047-01
380-0927-01
348-1159-00
348-1160-00
-----------
377-0579-00
050-A013-00
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
KNOB:.925DIA
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
KNOB:.425DIA
KNOB:1.700DIA
PANEL,FRONT:KEYBOARD,AWG500,POLYCARBONATE
STRIP,TRIM:FRONT PANEL,AL
SUBPANEL,FRONT:KEYBOARD,AL (AWG510)
SUBPANEL,FRONT:KEYBOARD,AL (AWG510)
SUBPANEL,FRONT:KEYBOARD,AL (AWG520)
SUBPANEL,FRONT:KEYBOARD,AL (AWG520)
HOLDER,SWITCH
J300305
J310174
J310173
-7
-8
SHIELD,ELEC:SST,W/CHEVRONS,0.4 PITCH,8.0 L
SHIELD,ELEC:SST,W/CHEVRONS,0.4 PITCH,5.0 L
(ATTACHING PART OF 1-9)
-9
-10
-11
-12
5
1
INSERT,KNOB:PLASTIC
80009
80009
3770579XX
REPLACEMENT KIT: INCLUDE WITH FPC (671-B081-XX) &
A20 (259-A001-00) BD, See 8-2
ORDER BY DESC
671-B081-XX
671-B081-XX
211-0946-00
J300155
J300181
1
1
6
CIRCUIT BOARD:A20,FRONT PANEL (AWG510)
CIRCUIT BOARD:A20,FRONT PANEL (AWG520)
80009
80009
80009
671B081XX
671B081XX
-13
-14
SCREW,ASSEM WSHR:M3 X 10MM,PNH,STL ZN PL,
W/FLAT & LOCK WSHR
ORDER BY DESC
348-1368-00
348-1622-00
348-1368-00
348-1622-00
J300251
J300254
36
cm
GASKET,SHIELD:FINGER TYPE,BE-CU, 609.6MM
LW/ADHESIVE (AWG510)
80009
80009
80009
80009
3481368XX
3481622XX
3481368XX
3481622XX
J300252
J300255
36
cm
GASKET,SHIELD:CONDUCTIVE URETHANE FORMSTRIP,
W/ADHESIVE TAPE, 5MM W X 1MM T (AWG510)
36
cm
GASKET,SHIELD:FINGER TYPE,BE-CU, 609.6MM
LW/ADHESIVE (AWG520)
36
cm
GASKET,SHIELD:CONDUCTIVE URETHANE FORMSTRIP,
W/ADHESIVE TAPE, 5MM W X 1MM T (AWG520)
-15
-16
386-7046-00
333-4262-00
1
1
SUBPANEL,FRONT:BNC,AL
80009
80009
3867046XX
3334262XX
PANEL,FRONT:BNC,AWG510,POLYCARBONATE
333-4263-00
131-1315-01
1
1
PANEL,FRONT:BNC,AWG520,POLYCARBONATE
80009
80009
3334263XX
1311315XX
-17
CONN,RF,JACK:BNC,50OHM,FEMALE,STR,PELTORA,
PANEL MOUNT
10-6
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
13
12
8
7
6
4
11
10
2
1
9
5
3
17
14
15
16
Figure 10-2: Front panel
10-7
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List
Fig. &
TektronixPart Serial No. Serial No.
Mfr.
Index
Number
Effective
Discont'd
Code
Qty Name & Description
Mfr.PartNumber
6714324XX
Number
3-1
671-4324-00
671-4324-01
671-4324-00
671-4324-01
159-0236-01
159-0335-00
159-0416-00
159-0059-01
212-0216-00
J300304
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
CIRCUIT BOARD:A10,CONNECTOR (AWG510)
CIRCUIT BOARD:A11,CONNECTOR (AWG510)
CIRCUIT BOARD:A10,CONNECTOR (AWG520)
CIRCUIT BOARD:A11,CONNECTOR (AWG520)
FUSE,WIRE-LEAD:AXI,10A,125V,FAST
FUSE,WIRE-LEAD:AXI,1A,125V,FAST
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
J300305
J310174
6714324XX
J310173
6714324XX
6714324XX
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
159023601
159033500
FUSE,WIRE-LEAD:AXI,7A,125V,FAST
159041600
FUSE,WIRE-LEAD:AXI,5A,125V,FAST
159005901
SCREW,MACHINE:M4X8MM L,PNH,STL,MFZN-C,
CROSS REC
ORDER BY DESC
-7
211-0945-00
1
SCREW,MACHINE:M4X8MM L,PNH,STL,MFZN-C,
CROSS REC
80009
ORDER BY DESC
-8
210-0008-00
620-0067-00
211-0945-00
1
1
6
WSHR,LOCK:#8 INTL,0.02 THK,STL CD PL
POWER SUPPLY
80009
80009
80009
2100008XX
-9
6200067XX
-10
SCREW,MACHINE:M4X8MM L,PNH,STL,MFZN-C,
CROSS REC
ORDER BY DESC
10-8
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
10
9
7
6
3
8
4
2
5
1
CPU unit
See Figure 10-5
for detailed view
A50 AWG board
See Figure 10-4
for detailed view
A40 Clockboard
See Figure 10-4
for detailed view
A71/A72 Output board
See Figure 10-4 for
detailed view
A75 Noise Generator board
See Figure 10-4 for detailed view
Figure 10-3: Outer chassis modules
10-9
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List
Fig. &
TektronixPart Serial No. Serial No.
Mfr.
Index
Number
Effective
Discont'd
Code
Qty Name & Description
Mfr.PartNumber
6714319XX
Number
4-1
671-4319-XX
671-4320-XX
212-0216-00
1
1
4
CIRCUIT BOARD:A71/A72,OUTPUT (AWG510 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BOARD:A71/A72,OUTPUT (AWG520 ONLY)
80080
80080
80009
6714320XX
-2
-3
SCREW,MACHINE:M4X8MM L,PNH,STL,MFZN-C,
CROSS REC
ORDER BY DESC
212-0216-00
4
SCREW,MACHINE:M4X8MM L,PNH,STL,MFZN-C,
CROSS REC
80009
ORDER BY DESC
-4
-5
671-4321-XX
366-0793-00
366-0793-01
366-0793-00
366-0793-01
343-1613-00
671-4318-XX
212-0216-00
1
2
2
2
2
4
1
6
CIRCUIT BOARD:A75,NOISE GENERATOR
PUSH BUTTON:TEK TAN (AWG510)
PUSH BUTTON:TEK TAN (AWG510)
PUSH BUTTON:TEK TAN (AWG520)
PUSH BUTTON:TEK TAN (AWG520)
RETAINER,CKT BD:A60 MEMORY,SST
CIRCUIT BOARD:A60,MEMORY
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
6714321XX
3660793XX
3660793XX
3660793XX
3660793XX
3431613XX
6714318XX
ORDER BY DESC
J300284
J300311
J300285
J300312
-6
-7
-8
SCREW,MACHINE:M4X8MM L,PNH,STL,MFZN-C,
CROSS REC
-9
131-6391-00
131-6391-00
131-6391-00
131-6391-00
212-0216-00
2
CONN,RF JACK: SMB,; MALE, STR, 50OHM, PNL MOUNT;
LEAD 5MM L (AWG510 STANDARD)
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
1316391XX
12
4
CONN,RF JACK: SMB,; MALE, STR, 50OHM, PNL MOUNT;
LEAD 5MM L (AWG510 OPTION03)
1316391XX
CONN,RF JACK: SMB,; MALE, STR, 50OHM, PNL MOUNT;
LEAD 5MM L (AWG520 STANDARD)
1316391XX
14
4
CONN,RF JACK: SMB,; MALE, STR, 50OHM, PNL MOUNT;
LEAD 5MM L (AWG520 OPTION03)
1316391XX
-10
SCREW,MACHINE:M4X8MM L,PNH,STL,MFZN-C,
CROSS REC
ORDER BY DESC
-11
-12
671-4316-XX
212-0216-00
1
CIRCUIT BOARD:A40,CLOCK
80009
80009
6714316XX
12
SCREW,MACHINE:M4X8MM L,PNH,STL,MFZN-C,
CROSS REC
ORDER BY DESC
-13
671-4317-XX
671-4335-XX
671-4333-XX
671-4334-XX
1
1
1
1
CIRCUIT BOARD:A50,AWG (AWG510 STANDARD ONLY)
CIRCUIT BOARD:A50,AWG (AWG510 OPTION03 ONLY)
CIRCUIT BOARD:A50,AWG (AWG520 STANDARD ONLY)
CIRCUIT BOARD:A50,AWG (AWG520 OPTION03 ONLY)
80009
80009
80009
80009
6714317XX
6714335XX
6714333XX
6714334XX
10-10
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
3
2
4
A75 Noise Generator board
A71/A72
Output board
1
9
8
5
6
10
7
A60 Memory board
11
A40 Clock board
12
13
A50 AWG board
Figure 10-4: Circuit boards
10-11
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List
Fig. &
TektronixPart SerialNo. SerialNo.
Mfr.
Index
Number
Effective
Discont'd
Code
Qty Name & Description
Mfr.PartNumber
1195774XX
Number
5-1
-2
119-5774-XX
211-0946-00
1
4
BOARD,ASSY:BACKPLANE
80009
80009
SCREW,ASSEM WSHR:M3 X 10MM,PNH,STL ZN PL,
W/FLAT & LOCK WSHR
ORDER BY DESC
-3
-4
211-0946-00
2
SCREW,ASSEM WSHR:M3 X 10MM,PNH,STL ZN PL,
W/FLAT & LOCK WSHR
80009
ORDER BY DESC
343-1614-00
343-A345-00
343-1614-00
343-A345-00
211-0946-00
J300304
J310173
1
1
1
1
1
RETAINER,CKT BD:CPU,AL (AWG510)
RETAINER,CKT BD:CPU,AL (AWG510)
RETAINER,CKT BD:CPU,AL (AWG520)
RETAINER,CKT BD:CPU,AL (AWG520)
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
3431614XX
J320101
J320101
3431651XX
3431614XX
3431651XX
-5
-6
SCREW,ASSEM WSHR:M3 X 10MM,PNH,STL ZN PL,
W/FLAT & LOCK WSHR
ORDER BY DESC
1
119-5775-10
J300304
1
BOARD,ASSY:CPU (AWG510)
80009
1195775XX
1196321XX
NOTE: The 3 V, 190 mAh Lithium battery on the CPU board is
not user-replaceable. Removing the battery erases configuration
and calibration data. Replace the CPU board as a unit.
1
119-B193-00
J320101
1
BOARD,ASSY:CPU (AWG510)
80009
NOTE: The 3 V, 190 mAh Lithium battery on the CPU board is
not user-replaceable. Removing the battery erases configuration
and calibration data. Replace the CPU board as a unit.
This part contains 119-B083-00 and 343-A345-00.
1
119-5775-10
119-B193-00
J310173
1
1
BOARD,ASSY:CPU (AWG520)
80009
80009
1195775XX
1196321XX
NOTE: The 3 V, 190 mAh Lithium battery on the CPU board is
not user-replaceable. Removing the battery erases configuration
and calibration data. Replace the CPU board as a unit.
1
J320101
BOARD,ASSY:CPU (AWG520)
NOTE: The 3 V, 190 mAh Lithium battery on the CPU board is
not user-replaceable. Removing the battery erases configuration
and calibration data. Replace the CPU board as a unit.
This part contains 119-B083-00 and 343-A345-00.
1
-7
-8
119-5776-10
671-4315-03
671-4825-02
671-4315-03
671-4825-02
211-0946-00
1
1
1
1
1
4
BOARD,ASSY:LAN
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
1195776XX
J300304
J310173
CIRCUIT BOARD:A30,GPIB (AWG510)
CIRCUIT BOARD:A30,GPIB
6714315XX
6714825XX
6714315XX
6714825XX
ORDER BY DESC
J320101
J320101
CIRCUIT BOARD:A30,GPIB (AWG520)
CIRCUIT BOARD:A30,GPIB
-9
SCREW,ASSEM WSHR:M3 X 10MM,PNH,STL ZN PL,
W/FLAT & LOCK WSHR
-10
-11
211-0871-00
211-0871-00
4
3
SCREW,ASSEM WSHR:M3 X 6MM L,STL,ZN PL,
W/FLAT & LOCK WSHR
80009
80009
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
SCREW,ASSEM WSHR:M3 X 6MM L,STL,ZN PL,
W/FLAT & LOCK WSHR
1
-12
-13
119-5779-XX
119-5778-XX
119-6133-XX
1
1
1
SOLID STATE DRIVE
80009
80009
80009
1195779XX
1195778XX
1195779XX
1
HARD DISK
1
FLASH DISK (Option 10 only)
1
These modules are calibrated and initialized before shipment.
10-12
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
1
5
3
2
4
6
Flash disk and Hard disk
See below for detailed view
7
8
10
9
11
12
Flash disk and Hard disk
13
Figure 10-5: CPU unit
10-13
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List
Fig. &
TektronixPart Serial No. Serial No.
Mfr.
Index
Number
Effective
Discont'd
Code
Qty Name & Description
Mfr.PartNumber
Number
6-1
211-0946-00
1
SCREW,ASSEM WSHR:M3 X 10MM,PNH,STL ZN PL,
W/FLAT & LOCK WSHR
80009
ORDER BY DESC
-2
-3
407-4554-00
174-3880-00
1
1
BRACKET,CONN:MODULAR CONN
80009
80009
4074554XX
174388000
J300251
J300254
CABLE,ASSY, SP, ELEC:35CM, 10 BASE-T W/TM8P-88P,
W10, LAN (AWG510)
174-3880-01
174-3880-00
174-3880-01
J300251
J300254
1
1
1
CABLE,ASSY, SP, ELEC:38CM, 10 BASE-T W/TM8P-88P,
W10, LAN (AWG510)
80009
80009
80009
174388001
174388000
174388001
CABLE,ASSY, SP, ELEC:35CM, 10 BASE-T W/TM8P-88P,
W10, LAN (AWG520)
CABLE,ASSY, SP, ELEC:38CM, 10 BASE-T W/TM8P-88P,
W10, LAN (AWG520)
-4
-5
-6
-7
220-0194-00
174-3881-00
671-4326-XX
129-1513-00
1
1
1
2
NUT,PLATE:STL
80009
80009
80009
80009
ORDER BY DESC
1743881XX
CABLE,ASSY:W170,GPIB
CIRCUIT BOARD:A90,KEYBOARD
6714326XX
SPACER,POST:15MM L,M3.5 X 6MM INT/M3 EXT,BRS,
7MM OD
1291513XX
-8
-9
174-3879-00
129-1051-00
1
4
CABLE,ASSY:W127,DISPLAY MONITOR OUT
80009
80009
1743879XX
1291051XX
SPACER,POST:4.8MM L,4-40INT/4-40EXT,
STL 4.8MM HEX W/WSHR
-10
-11
174-3878-00
131-1315-01
1
6
CABLE,ASSY:W520,EVENT OUT
80009
80009
1743878XX
1311315XX
CONN,RF,JACK:BNC,50OHM,FEMALE,STR,PELTORA,
PANEL MOUNT
-12
-13
211-0945-00
6
SCREW,MACHINE:M4X8MM L,PNH,STL,MFZN-C,
CROSS REC
80009
ORDER BY DESC
386-7000-00
386-7000-01
386-7000-00
386-7000-01
348-1569-00
J300294
J300358
1
1
1
1
SUBPANEL, FRONT (FINISHED) (AWG510)
SUBPANEL, FRONT (FINISHED) (AWG510)
SUBPANEL, FRONT (FINISHED) (AWG520)
SUBPANEL, FRONT (FINISHED) (AWG520)
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
386700000
386700001
386700000
386700001
3481569XX
J300295
J300359
-14
114
cm
SHLD GASKET, ELEC: MESH TYPE, 3.2MM OD,
SI SPONGE CORE
-15
-16
-17
344-0472-00
343-0549-00
220-0193-00
8
3
2
BUSHING: BUSHING, NYLON, GRAY
80009
80009
80009
3440472XX
STRAP, TIEDOWN: 1.6-19MM DIA, 66NYLON
NUT, PLAIN, HEX: M4X7MM HEX, STL, ZN-C
3430549XX
ORDER BY DESC
10-14
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
7
9
8
10
5
4
11
3
2
1
6
15
14
13
12
15
17
16
Figure 10-6: Chassis
10-15
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List
Fig. &
TektronixPart Serial No. Serial No.
Mfr.
Index
Number
Effective
Discont'd
Code
Qty Name & Description
Mfr.PartNumber
Number
7-1
050-3341-XX
1
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE REPLACEMENT KIT: INCLUDE WITH
SHASSIS (441-2224-XX), SPACER (105-1081-XX), FLAT
CABLE (174-B329-XX) & SCREWS, See 7-2 TO 7-9.
80009
0503341XX
119-5953-00
119-5953-00
105-1081-00
105-1081-00
211-1033-00
J300295
J300380
J300295
J300380
J300295
1
1
1
1
1
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE: (AWG510)
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE: (AWG520)
BRACKET,,SPACER (AWG510)
BRACKET,,SPACER (AWG520)
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
1195953XX
1195953XX
-2
-3
1051081XX
1051081XX
SCREW, MACHINE: M2.6X3MM L, PNH, BRS, NI PL, CROSS
REC (AWG510)
ORDER BY DESC
211-1033-00
J300380
1
SCREW, MACHINE: M2.6X3MM L, PNH, BRS, NI PL, CROSS
REC (AWG520)
80009
ORDER BY DESC
-4
-5
441-2224-00
441-2224-00
J300305
J310174
J300305
1
1
1
CHASSIS, FDD: STL, SHIELD (AWG510)
CHASSIS, FDD: STL, SHIELD (AWG520)
80009
80009
80009
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
CHASSIS, FDD: STL, BRACKET, ATTACHING PART OF 7-4
(AWG510)
J310174
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
CHASSIS, FDD: STL, BRACKET, ATTACHING PART OF 7-4
(AWG520)
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
-6
211-0854-00
211-0823-00
211-0854-00
211-0823-00
211-1034-00
211-1034-00
211-0945-00
212-0216-00
211-0945-00
212-0216-00
J300294
J300379
SCREW, MACHINE: M2.6X4MM L, BDGH, STL, MFZN-C,
CROSS REC (AWG510)
J300295
SCREW, MACHINE: M2.6 X 5MM L, BDGH, STL, MFZN-C,
CROSS REC (AWG510)
SCREW, MACHINE: M2.6 X4MM L, BDGH, STL, MFZN-C,
CROSS REC (AWG520)
J300380
J300295
J300380
SCREW, MACHINE: M2.6 X 5MM L, BDGH, STL, MFZN-C,
CROSS REC (AWG520)
-7
-8
SCREW, MACHINE: M2.6 X 10MM L, PNH, STL, MFZN-C,
CROSS REC (AWG510)
SCREW,MACHINE:M2.6 X 10MM L, PNH, STL, MFZN-C,
CROSS REC (AWG520)
J300304
J310173
SCREW, MACHINE: M4X8MM L, PNH, STL, MFZN-C, CROSS
REC (AWG510)
J300305
J310174
SCREW, MACHINE: M4X8MM L, PNH, STL, MFZN-C, CROSS
REC, W/FLAT & LOCK WASHER (AWG510)
SCREW, MACHINE: M4X8MM L, PNH, STL, MFZN-C, CROSS
REC (AWG520)
SCREW, MACHINE: M4X8MM L, PNH, STL, MFZN-C, CROSS
REC, W/FLAT & LOCK WASHER (AWG520)
-9
174-B329-01
174-B329-01
211-0948-00
J300295
J300380
1
CABLE ASSEY,SP,ELEC:26COND,150MM L,FFC (AWG510)
CABLE ASSEY,SP,ELEC:26COND,150MM L,FFC (AWG520)
80009
80009
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
1
-10
12
SCREW, MACHINE: M4X45MML, PNH, STL, MFZN-C, CROSS 80009
REC W/FLAT & LOCK WSHR
-11
-12
119-5777-00
343-0549-00
3
4
FAN, TUBE AXIAL: 12V, 0.6A, 7.2W, 2520RPM, 3.04MMM
STRAP, TIEDOWN: 1.6-19MM DIA, 66NYLON
80009
80009
1195777XX
3430549XX
10-16
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
6
4
See below
9
1
8
5
7
2
3
11
10
12
Figure 10-7: Floppy disk and Fan
10-17
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List
Fig. &
TektronixPart Serial No. Serial No.
Mfr.
Index
Number
Effective
Discont'd
Code
Qty Name & Description
Mfr.PartNumber
Number
8-1
211-0945-00
3
1
SCREW, MACHINE: M4X8MM L, PNH, STL, MFZN-C,
CROSS REC
80009
80009
ORDER BY DESC
-2
050-A013-00
REPLACEMENT KIT: INCLUDE WITH FPC (671-B081-XX) &
A20 (259-A001-00) BD, See 2-12
ORDER BY DESC
259-A001-00
259-A001-00
426-2576-00
426-2576-01
426-2576-00
426-2576-01
378-0448-00
378-0448-01
378-0466-00
378-0448-00
378-0448-01
378-0466-00
386-6211-02
211-0945-00
J300155
J300181
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
REPLACEMENT KIT:FPC & A20 BD (AWG510)
REPLACEMENT KIT:FPC & A20 BD (AWG520)
FRAME, DISPLAY: MAINFILTER, AL (AWG 510)
FRAME, DISPLAY: MAINFILTER, AL (AWG 510)
FRAME, DISPLAY: MAINFILTER, AL (AWG 520)
FRAME, DISPLAY: MAINFILTER, AL (AWG 520)
FILTER, LIGHT: ACRILIC (AWG 510)
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
4262576XX
-3
-4
J300304
J310173
J300305
J310174
4262576XX
4262576XX
4262576XX
J300284
J300304
3780448XX
J300285
J320101
FILTER, LIGHT: ACRILIC (AWG 510)
3780448XX
FILTER, LIGHT: ACRILIC (AWG 510)
3780466XX
J300311
J310173
FILTER, LIGHT: ACRILIC (AWG 520)
3780448XX
J300312
J320101
FILTER, LIGHT: ACRILIC (AWG 520)
3780448XX
FILTER, LIGHT: ACRILIC (AWG 520)
3780466XX
-5
-6
RETAINER, FILTER: DUST SEAL ASSY, LEXAN
386621102
SCREW, MACHINE: M4X8MM L, PNH, STL, MFZN-C,
CROSS REC
ORDER BY DESC
-7
640-0071-05
640-0071-06
119-5922-00
640-0071-05
640-0071-06
119-5922-00
211-0946-00
J300144
J300294
-
-
-
-
-
-
6
CRT (AWG510)
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
640007105
J300145
J300295
CRT (AWG510)
640007106
DISPLAY, MONITOR: 8 INCH, K8MM-01A (AWG510)
CRT (AWG520)
1195922XX
640007105
J300154
J300358
J300155
J300359
CRT (AWG520)
640007106
DISPLAY, MONITOR: 8 INCH, K8MM-01A (AWG520)
1195922XX
ORDER BY DESC
-8
-9
SCREW, ASSEM WSHR: M3 X 10MM, PNH, STL ZN PL,
W/FLAT & LOCK WSHR
211-0945-00
2
SCREW, MACHINE: M4X8MM L, PNH, STL, MFZN-C,
CROSS REC
80009
ORDER BY DESC
10-18
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
9
8
7
5
4
3
6
1
2
Figure 10-8: Display
10-19
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List
Fig. &
TektronixPart Serial No. Serial No.
Mfr.
Index
Number
Effective
Discont'd
Code
Qty Name & Description
Mfr.PartNumber
3510623XX
Number
9-1
-2
351-0623-00
212-0507-00
351-0313-00
407-4555-00
407-4555-01
407-4555-00
407-4555-01
212-0214-00
1
4
1
2
2
2
2
6
SLIDE,DWR,EXT:22.0 X 1.54,STEELSAFETY CONTROLLED
SCREW,MACHINE:10-32 X 0.375,PNH,STL CD PL,POZ
GUIDE,RACKMOUNT:19.218 L,PAIR
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
ORDER BY DESC
3510313XX
-3
-4
J300212
J300186
BRACKET,SUPPORT:SIDE,RACKMOUNT,AL (AWG510)
BRACKET,SUPPORT:SIDE,RACKMOUNT,AL (AWG510)
BRACKET,SUPPORT:SIDE,RACKMOUNT,AL (AWG520)
BRACKET,SUPPORT:SIDE,RACKMOUNT,AL (AWG520)
407455500
J300213
J300187
407455501
407455500
407455501
-5
SCREW,MACHINE:M5X12MM L,PNH,STL ZN PL,
CROSS REC W/FLAT & LOCK WSHR
ORDER BY DESC
-6
-7
-8
-9
212-0509-00
210-1003-00
210-0142-00
212-0215-00
4
4
4
4
SCREW,MACHINE:10-32 X 0.625,PNH,STL CD PL,POZ
WSHR,FLAT:0.2 ID X 0.438 OD X 0.036 BRS NP
WSHR,PLAIN:5.5MM ID X 12MM OD,TEFLON
80009
80009
80009
80009
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
ORDER BY DESC
SCREW,MACHINE:M4X12MM L,PNH,STL,MFZN-C,
CROSS REC
-10
-11
-12
-13
407-4020-00
212-0507-00
367-0022-00
101-0142-01
2
4
2
1
BRACKET,SUPPORT:FRONT,ALUMINUM
SCREW,MACHINE:10-32 X 0.375,PNH,STL CD PL,POZ
HANDLE,BOW:4.579 L,BRS CRPL
80009
80009
80009
80009
4074020XX
ORDER BY DESC
3670022XX
TRIM,DECORATIVE:FRONT
101014201
10-20
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
4
1
2
5
3
4
5
10
11
8
7
9
6
3
2
12
11
13
1
9
10
12
6
7
8
Figure 10-9: Rack mount
10-21
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List
Fig. &
TektronixPart Serial No. Serial No.
Mfr.
Index
Number
Effective
Discont'd
Code
Qty Name & Description
Mfr.PartNumber
Number
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
SOFTWARE PKG:3.5 DISK,AWG500 WAVEFORMLIB
063-2981-XX
063-2982-XX
063-2983-XX
071-0099-XX
071-0100-XX
-----------
1
1
1
1
1
1
0632981XX
0632982XX
0632983XX
0710099XX
0710100XX
SOFTWARE PKG:3.5 DISK,AWG500 SERIES SAMPLE PRGM
SOFTWARE PKG:3.5 DISK,AWG500 PERF CHECK/ADJ
MANUAL,TECH:USER,AWG500
MANUAL,TECH:PROGRAMMER,ENGLISH VERSION,AWG
CABLE ASSY,PWR:3,18 AWG,92 L,SVT,TAN
(SEE FIGURE 10-1-6)
161-0104-06
161-0104-07
161-0104-05
161-0104-08
161-0167-00
1
1
1
1
1
CA ASSY,PWR:3,1.0MM SQ,250V/10A,2.5 METER
(OPTION A1 - EUROPEAN)
S3109
S3109
S3109
198-010
209010
CA ASSY,PWR:3,1.0MM SQ,240V/10A,2.5 METER
(OPTION A2 - UNITED KINGDOM)
CA ASSY,PWR:3,1.0MM SQ,250V/10A,2.5 METER
(OPTION A3 - AUSTRALIAN)
198-010
CA ASSY,PWR:3,18 AWG,250/10A,98 INCH L
(OPTION A4 - NORTH AMERICAN)
2W733 ORDER BY DESC
CA ASSY,PWR:3,0.75MM SQ,250V/10A,2.5 METER
(OPTION A5 - SWITZERLAND)
S3109
ORDER BY DESC
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
011-0049-01
012-0991-00
012-1256-00
012-1342-00
012-1458-00
012-1459-00
015-0657-00
015-0658-00
015-0659-00
015-0660-00
200-3696-01
071-0101-XX
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TERMN,COAXIAL:50 OHM,2W,BNC
64537
T132DS
CABLE,INTCON:SHLD CMPST,GPIB;CRC,12 TW PR
CABLE,INTCON:50 OHMCOAX,98.0 L
6D224 81190-020
80009
80009
0121256XX
0121342XX
0121458XX
0121459XX
0150657XX
0150658XX
0150659XX
0150660XX
200369601
0710101XX
CA ASSY,RF:COAXIAL,;RFD,50 OHM,24 L,BNC,MALE
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHMCOAX,100CML,SMB-SMB
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHMCOAX,100CML,SMB-BNC
FILTER,LOW PASS:100MHZ,50 OHM,BNC,TUBULAR
FILTER,LOW PASS:200MHZ,50 OHM,BNC,TUBULAR
FILTER,LOW PASS:400MHZ,50 OHM,BNC,TUBULAR
FILTER,LOW PASS:DC-800MHZ,50 OHM,0.5W,BNC
COVER,FRONT:PLASTIC
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
MANUAL,TECH:SERVICE,AWG500
10-22
AWG510 & AWG520 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|